WO2020200002A1 - Communication method and terminal device - Google Patents
Communication method and terminal device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2020200002A1 WO2020200002A1 PCT/CN2020/081064 CN2020081064W WO2020200002A1 WO 2020200002 A1 WO2020200002 A1 WO 2020200002A1 CN 2020081064 W CN2020081064 W CN 2020081064W WO 2020200002 A1 WO2020200002 A1 WO 2020200002A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- terminal device
- reference signal
- synchronization
- information
- synchronization information
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 102
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 77
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 103
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 claims description 68
- 235000008694 Humulus lupulus Nutrition 0.000 claims description 66
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 52
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 claims description 19
- 108010076504 Protein Sorting Signals Proteins 0.000 abstract description 7
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 19
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012795 verification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001427 coherent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005562 fading Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
- H04W56/001—Synchronization between nodes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/185—Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/185—Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
- H04B7/1851—Systems using a satellite or space-based relay
- H04B7/18517—Transmission equipment in earth stations
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0061—Error detection codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0053—Allocation of signalling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/70—Services for machine-to-machine communication [M2M] or machine type communication [MTC]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
Definitions
- This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and terminal device.
- V2V Device-to-device
- V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
- V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
- V2I/ N vehicle-to-infrastructure/network
- V2I/ N vehicle-to-infrastructure/network
- D2D and V2X communication needs to achieve synchronization between communicating terminal devices.
- the communicating UE can directly detect the network or GNSS, the best strategy for the UE is to synchronize to these devices.
- the UE cannot detect the network or GNSS, the UE can synchronize to the synchronization source UE that sends the synchronization signal.
- the transmission period of the synchronization signal is usually relatively long.
- the period of the LTE-V2X synchronization signal is 160 ms.
- the UE misses the detection or misses the synchronization signal it will increase the time for the device to obtain the timing and lock the frequency, thereby affecting the communication performance. Therefore, how to improve the signal synchronization efficiency of the terminal device has become an important issue to be solved urgently.
- the present application provides a communication method and terminal device, which can improve the efficiency of signal synchronization of the terminal device.
- a communication method including: a first terminal device determines a sequence of a first reference signal according to synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or, the first terminal device determines a sequence of a first reference signal according to the first terminal device
- the synchronization information of the device determines the resource used to send the first reference signal; the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: The type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops between the first terminal device and the satellite or network equipment, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, whether the first terminal device In the coverage of network equipment.
- the first terminal device may use the parameters of the sequence of generating the first reference signal to indicate or carry synchronization information.
- the first terminal device may only be a device that transmits a sidelink synchronization signal SLSS (sidelink synchronization signal), or the first terminal device may only be a device that does not transmit an SLSS.
- SLSS sidelink synchronization signal
- the first terminal device may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal (RS) to indicate the synchronization information, the first terminal device may be a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the first terminal device may not send a synchronization signal Device.
- RS reference signal
- the first terminal device uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to the second terminal device.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and the first terminal device sends RS1 or RS2 to the second terminal device according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, and the first terminal device sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to the second terminal device according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the synchronization information of the first terminal device is used by the second terminal device to determine the synchronization source of the second terminal device.
- the first terminal device determining the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device includes: The synchronization information determines a parameter of the sequence of the first reference signal, and the parameter includes at least one of the following parameters: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, Orthogonal cover code (OCC) and sequence length of the sequence.
- the synchronization information determines a parameter of the sequence of the first reference signal, and the parameter includes at least one of the following parameters: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, Orthogonal cover code (OCC) and sequence length of the sequence.
- OCC Orthogonal cover code
- the first terminal device determining the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device includes: the first terminal device according to The synchronization information determines the subcarrier of the first reference signal in the physical resource block.
- the first terminal device determining the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device includes: the first terminal device according to the synchronization information Information and the synchronization signal identifier used by the first device to determine at least one of the following parameters of the sequence of the first reference signal: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, and the cyclic shift of the sequence Bit value, sequence orthogonal cover code OCC, sequence length.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device determines the first reference signal according to the number of symbols in the time slot in which the first reference signal is carried And/or, the first terminal device determines the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the bandwidth of the first reference signal.
- the first terminal device determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the first terminal The apparatus determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal; wherein the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal includes: The synchronization information is mapped on two adjacent symbols of the time slot where the first reference signal is located; the time slot where the first reference signal is located includes at least two symbols.
- the type of the synchronization source includes at least one of the following: Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, terminal devices synchronized to the GNSS, NR network equipment, synchronization Terminal devices to the NR base station equipment, LTE base station equipment, and equipment synchronized to the LTE base station equipment.
- the first reference signal includes any one of the following reference signals: a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) used for control channels, Demodulation reference signal DMRS for data channel, demodulation reference signal DMRS for broadcast channel, reference signal for feedback channel, channel state information reference signal (channel state information-reference signal, CSI-RS), phase tracking reference Signal (phase tracking reference signal, PT-RS).
- DMRS demodulation reference signal
- DMRS demodulation reference signal
- DMRS demodulation reference signal
- DMRS Demodulation reference signal
- DMRS for broadcast channel
- reference signal for feedback channel reference signal for feedback channel
- channel state information reference signal channel state information-reference signal
- CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
- phase tracking reference Signal phase tracking reference signal
- the reference signal RS#1 may be the DMRS used when UE#1 transmits data, and/or the DMRS used for control information when UE#1 transmits scheduling data.
- the method before the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the method further includes: the first terminal device determines The sequence length of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value; or the first terminal device determines that the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a second preset value.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device sends first control information to the second terminal device, where the first control information is used to indicate Part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device; or, the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the method further includes: the first terminal device sends first data to the second terminal device, and the cyclic redundancy correction of the first data
- the verification code is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the method before the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the method further includes: the first terminal device determines The first terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- the first reference signal, the first control information, and/or the first data are located in the same time slot; or, the first reference The signal, the first control information and/or the first data are located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
- a communication method including: a second terminal device receives a first reference signal from a first terminal device; the second terminal device determines the first reference signal according to a sequence of the first reference signal The synchronization information of the terminal device, and/or the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal; the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the The synchronization information determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, the synchronization source of the first terminal device and The number of synchronization hops between satellites, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment.
- the second terminal device may detect different reference signals (RS) corresponding to the synchronization information, and the second terminal device obtains the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the received different RSs.
- RS reference signals
- the second terminal device acquires the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 transmitted by the first terminal device.
- the second terminal device detects the sequence actually used by the first terminal device from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2) to obtain Up to this 1-bit synchronization information.
- the second terminal device detects from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), the actual use of the first terminal device Sequence to obtain the 2-bit synchronization information actually transmitted.
- the second terminal device determining synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal includes: the second terminal device The synchronization information of the first terminal device is determined according to the subcarriers of the first reference signal in the physical resource block.
- the synchronization information is used by the second terminal device to determine the synchronization source of the second terminal device.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the second terminal The device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device and the priority information of the synchronization source.
- the method further includes: the second terminal device detects the signal quality of the first reference signal; when the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than At the first threshold, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source; the second device determines the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source.
- the method further includes: the second terminal device receives the first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device; When the first terminal device satisfies a preset condition, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source; the second device determines the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source;
- the preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is checked correctly; or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is checked correctly Or, the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value.
- the method further includes: the second terminal device receiving first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device; The second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the DMRS of the first data and the DMRS of the first control information; or the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the cyclic redundancy calibration of the first data.
- the verification code and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the method further includes: the second terminal device detects the side link synchronization signal sent by the third device, and the second terminal device detects A priority information determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device, and the first priority information includes any one of the following: the number of hops that the third device synchronizes to a satellite or a base station and the first terminal device The number of hops synchronized to the satellite or base station is the same, and the priority of the first terminal device and the third device are the same; the number of hops synchronized to the satellite or the base station by the third device is the same as that of the first terminal device to the satellite Or the number of hops of the base station is the same, the first terminal device has a higher priority relative to the third device; the third device is synchronized to the satellite or the number of hops of the base station is synchronized to the satellite Or the number of hops of the base station is the same, the first terminal device has a lower priority relative to the third device; the third
- the method before the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device, the method further includes: the second terminal device determines the second The terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- the type of the synchronization source includes at least one of the following: Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, equipment synchronized to the GNSS, NR base station equipment, synchronized to The equipment of the NR base station equipment, the LTE base station equipment, and the equipment synchronized to the LTE base station equipment.
- the first reference signal includes any one of the following signals: a demodulation reference signal DMRS for a control channel, a demodulation reference signal DMRS for a data channel, and a broadcast Channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, feedback channel reference signal, channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal PT-RS.
- the first reference signal, the first control information, and/or the first data are located in the same time slot; or the first reference signal , The first control information and/or the first data are located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
- the first terminal device is a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the first terminal device is a device that does not send a synchronization signal.
- a communication device is provided, and the terminal device is configured to execute the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the terminal device may include a module for executing the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the terminal device may be a network device, a terminal, a chip applied to a network device or a terminal, or other combination devices, components, etc. having the functions of the network device or terminal.
- the receiving module may be a receiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
- the processing module may be a processor, for example, a central processing unit (CPU), and the sending module may be a transmitter. It may include antennas and radio frequency circuits, etc., where the receiver and transmitter may be integrated transceivers.
- the receiving module may be a radio frequency unit
- the processing module may be a processor
- the sending module may be a radio frequency unit.
- the receiving module may be an input port of the chip system
- the processing module may be a processor of the chip system
- the sending module may be an output port of the chip system.
- a communication device in a fourth aspect, includes a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute instructions stored in the memory, and perform operations on the instructions stored in the memory. Executing causes the processor to execute the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect.
- the device is a communication chip
- the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
- the apparatus is a communication device
- the communication device may include a device for sending information or data and a device for receiving information or data.
- a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, causing the computer to execute the first aspect to the first aspect.
- the method in any one of the two possible implementation modes.
- Fig. 1 shows a schematic scene diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- Fig. 2 shows a schematic scene diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
- Fig. 3 shows a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of a communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 6 shows a schematic interaction diagram of another communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
- Fig. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
- FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
- FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
- FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of the sequence of the reference signal of the present application.
- FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of reference signal resources of the present application.
- FIG. 15 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
- FIG. 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
- GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
- CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
- GPRS General Packet Radio Service
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- FDD Frequency Division Duplex
- TDD Time Division Duplex
- UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
- WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
- 5G 5th Generation
- 5NR New Radio
- the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, terminal, wireless Communication equipment, user agent or user device.
- the terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or future evolution of the public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) Terminal equipment, etc., this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
- SIP Session Initiation Protocol
- WLL Wireless Local Loop
- PDA Personal Digital Assistant
- the network device in the embodiment of the application may be a device used to communicate with a terminal device.
- the network device may be a Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) system or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
- GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
- CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
- BTS Base Transceiver Station
- BTS base station
- NodeB, NB base station
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- Evolutional Base Station Evolution
- NodeB eNB, or eNodeB
- it can also be a wireless controller in Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN) scenarios, or the network device can be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device, and future
- CRAN Cloud Radio Access Network
- the network equipment in the 5G network or the network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc., are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may be a network device, a terminal, a chip applied to a network device or terminal, or other combination devices or components with the above-mentioned network device or terminal function.
- the communication method of this application can be applied to device to device (D2D) communication, vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle to pedestrian (Vehicle to Pedestrian, V2P) communication, or vehicle to infrastructure/network ( Vehicle to Infrastructure/Network, V2I/N) communication.
- D2D device to device
- V2V vehicle to vehicle
- V2P vehicle to pedestrian
- V2I/N vehicle to infrastructure/network
- D2D and V2X communication needs to achieve synchronization between communicating terminal devices.
- the communicating terminal device can directly detect the network or GNSS, the best strategy for the terminal device is to synchronize to these devices.
- the terminal device cannot detect the network or GNSS, the terminal device can synchronize to the synchronization source terminal device that sends the synchronization signal.
- the transmission period of the synchronization signal is usually relatively long. For example, the period of the LTE-V2X synchronization signal is 160 ms. In this case, if the terminal device misses the detection or misses the synchronization signal, it will increase the time for the device to obtain the timing and lock the frequency, thereby affecting the communication performance.
- CAZAC sequence characteristics include the following characteristics: 1. Constant envelope characteristics: CAZAC sequence of any length has a constant amplitude. 2. Ideal periodic autocorrelation characteristics: After any CAZAC sequence is shifted by n bits, and n is not an integral multiple of the period of the CAZAC sequence, the shifted sequence is not related to the original sequence. 3. Good cross-correlation characteristics: the cross-correlation and partial correlation values are close to 0. 4. Low peak-to-average ratio: The signal composed of any CAZAC sequence has a very low ratio of its peak value to its average value. 5. CAZAC sequence after Fourier transform: any CAZAC sequence is still CAZAC sequence after Fourier positive and negative changes.
- CAZAC sequences are now widely used in the field of pulse radar compression, spread spectrum communication systems (synchronous CDMA and MC-CDMA), and OFDM systems (LTE and WiMAX).
- CAZAC sequence mainly includes Zadoff-off sequence (ie ZC sequence), Frank sequence, Golomb polyphase sequence and Chirp sequence.
- ZC sequence is often used in synchronization algorithms of communication systems.
- the ZC sequence has good auto-correlation and cross-correlation characteristics, so it is selected as the pilot sequence in the wireless communication system, and is specifically applied to the primary synchronization signal (Primary Synchronization Signal, PSS) and uplink in the downlink.
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- the RS (Reference Signal) reference signal is the "pilot" signal.
- the downlink reference signal has two functions: 1. Downlink channel quality measurement; 2. Downlink channel estimation, used for coherent detection and demodulation on the terminal equipment side.
- the downlink reference signal is based on REs, that is, one reference signal occupies one RE (resource element).
- the reference signal sent by the first terminal device is abbreviated as RS#1, which is the first reference signal mentioned in this application.
- the reference signal can be divided into two columns: reference signal #1 and reference signal #2, where reference signal #1 is located in the first OFDM symbol of slot 0, and reference signal #2 is located in the third OFDM symbol from the bottom of the slot. symbol.
- the reference signal #1 located in the first OFDM symbol helps the downlink control signal to be demodulated as soon as possible.
- a reference signal is inserted every 6 subcarriers. This value is the result of balancing channel estimation performance and RS overhead. It can not only achieve good channel estimation performance in typical frequency selective fading channels, but also Control RS at a low level.
- the time domain density of RS is that two rows of RS are inserted in each slot.
- Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of the communication method of the present application. It should be noted that the following uses UE as an example. For the convenience of description, as a shorthand description, UE#1, UE#2, UE#3, UE#4, UE#5, UE#6, UE Any one or more of #7 can be considered as a specific example of the first terminal device and the third terminal device when it is a transmitter; it can be considered as a specific example of the second terminal device when it is a receiver .
- the foregoing description of the present invention does not constitute a limitation on the scope of the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the third terminal device.
- the communication method of the present application can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles.
- the signal synchronization system of the Internet of Vehicles includes: multiple vehicle-mounted devices (UE#1, UE#2, UE#3), between vehicle-mounted devices Can communicate with each other; one or more roadside units (RSU) can communicate with various vehicle-mounted equipment and/or eNB; one or more LTE base station equipment (eNB) can communicate with each vehicle-mounted equipment and/or RSU; One or more NR base station equipment (gNB), which can communicate with various vehicle-mounted equipment and/or RSU; one or more global navigation satellite systems (GNSS: global navigation satellite system), which can provide positioning and positioning for multiple vehicle-mounted equipment Timing information.
- the function of the RSU unit can be either a function of a vehicle-mounted device, a function of an eNB or gNB device, or a function of a vehicle-mounted device + an eNB device.
- the vehicle-mounted equipment moves at a high speed with the vehicle, and the relative movement between UE#1 and UE#2 has the maximum relative moving speed.
- the above-mentioned various devices can communicate with each other, and the spectrum of the cellular link can be used for communication, and the spectrum of intelligent traffic can also be used, for example, the spectrum near 5.9 GHz.
- the technology for each device to communicate with each other can be enhanced based on the LTE protocol, can also be enhanced based on the D2D technology, or it can be a newly defined side link system in NR.
- eNB and/or gNB are optional. If there is eNB and/or gNB, it is a scenario with network coverage; if there is no eNB or gNB, it is a scenario without network coverage.
- the first terminal device and the second terminal device are referred to as UE#1 and UE#2, respectively.
- Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network structure of multiple types of synchronization sources.
- UE#2 can detect synchronization signals and/or reference signals sent from UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7. Therefore, when UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 meet the preset requirements Under conditions, UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- UE#2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling assignment (SA) information sent from UE#1 (or UE#3, UE#7); when UE#1, UE#3, UE# 7 When the preset conditions are met, UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources of UE#2 or directly determined as synchronization sources.
- SA is usually used to indicate the transmission parameters of data #D1 so that the receiver can be used to demodulate and decode the data.
- these sending parameters include indication information of time and frequency resources for transmitting data, indication information of modulation and coding mode, indication information of retransmission, etc.
- the above-mentioned preset condition may include at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check of data #D1 is correct or successful; the cyclic redundancy check of the scheduled allocation SA information is correct or successful; reference The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbols of the signal RS#1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the second preset value.
- UE#1 when UE#1 sends a reference signal to UE#2, it can indicate to UE#2 that the candidate synchronization source type of UE#1 is GNSS, and that UE#2's hop count is The first hop, here, assume that the number of hops from GNSS to UE#1 is the 0th hop.
- UE#2 can receive the reference signals sent by UE#1 and UE#3, when UE#1 and UE#3 have the same synchronization source, UE#2 can synchronize to the synchronization source according to UE#1 and UE#3.
- the number of hops selects the synchronization source; or, UE#2 can select the synchronization source according to the signal quality of the reference signals sent by UE#1 and UE#3.
- the synchronization source of UE#1 and UE#3 may be GNSS or eNB/gNB.
- UE#2 simultaneously detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE#3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE#1.
- the synchronization source of UE#1 is GNSS
- UE#1 may carry synchronization information in the reference signal RS sent to it before the time when the synchronization signal is sent.
- UE#3 may be a UE that sends a synchronization signal, and UE#3 is synchronized to the GNSS or eNB, so that UE#2 can receive synchronization information sent by UE#1 and UE#3 at the same time.
- UE#2 when UE#2 detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE#3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE#1 at the same time, when the RS detected by UE#2 from UE#1 meets the preset condition, UE#2 can use UE#1 as the synchronization source of UE#2.
- the synchronization information may be used to indicate at least one of the following information: the type of synchronization source of UE#1, the number of hops between UE#1 and the synchronization source GNSS or synchronization source gNB/eNB, UE Whether #1 is directly synchronized to a satellite or network equipment, and whether UE#1 is within the coverage of the network equipment.
- the type of synchronization source includes any one of GNSS, eNB, gNB, and UE.
- the UE may be: a UE that is synchronized to GNSS, a UE that is synchronized to an eNB, a UE that is synchronized to a gNB, or a UE that is not synchronized to other devices.
- the synchronization information may indicate that UE#1 is synchronized to GNSS, or gNB/eNB.
- the synchronization information may indicate the number of synchronization hops between UE#1 and GNSS or gNB/eNB.
- the number of synchronization hops between UE#1 synchronized to GNSS or gNB/eNB can be understood as the number of timing transfers for UE#1 to synchronize to GNSS or gNB/eNB.
- the number of synchronization hops between UE#1 and GNSS is 1.
- UE4 synchronizes to UE1
- UE1 directly synchronizes to GNSS
- the number of hops from UE4 to GNSS is 2.
- fewer bits can be used to indicate whether UE#1 is directly synchronized to a satellite or network device. For example, using 1 bit and a value of 1 indicates direct synchronization to a satellite or network device. A value of 0 means that it is not directly synchronized to a satellite or network device.
- Another example use fewer bits to indicate whether UE#1 is within the coverage of the network device. For example, 1 bit is used to indicate whether UE#1 is within the coverage of the network device. Being within the coverage of the network device here means that the UE can receive system messages sent from the network device, or can establish a connection state with the network device.
- the network device may be a GNSS or gNB/eNB that sends a synchronization signal, and it may also be a UE that sends a synchronization signal.
- the synchronization information may only include the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the GNSS or network equipment synchronization source, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, Whether the first terminal device is in any one of the multiple types of information within the coverage of the network device may also be any two, any three, or all four.
- the synchronization information may be the type of synchronization source and whether it is directly synchronized to GNSS or network equipment.
- 1 bit can be used to indicate whether the synchronization source is a network device or a satellite; 1 bit can be used to indicate whether to directly synchronize to a GNSS or network device.
- the synchronization information is 2 bits in total.
- the synchronization information may include: the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, and the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of the GNSS or network equipment.
- 1 bit can be used to indicate that the type of synchronization source is GNSS or network equipment, and 2 bits can be used to indicate the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of the GNSS or network equipment.
- the synchronization information is whether to directly synchronize to GNSS.
- the synchronization information may include the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of the GNSS or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment.
- Kind of information A total of 4 bits can be used to indicate. At this time, 1 bit can be used to indicate that the type of synchronization source is GNSS or network equipment, 2 bits are used to indicate the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of GNSS or network equipment, and 1 bit is used to indicate whether it is in the coverage of the network equipment.
- the synchronization information may include the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the GNSS or network equipment synchronization source, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, and the All four types of information are whether a terminal device is within the coverage of network equipment.
- a total of 5 bits can be used to indicate.
- the priority of a UE that is directly synchronized to a satellite or network device is higher than that of a UE that is indirectly synchronized to a satellite or network device.
- the priority of the UE synchronized to the GNSS is higher than that of the UE synchronized to the gNB/eNB, or the priority of the UE synchronized to the GNSS is lower than the priority of the UE synchronized to the gNB/eNB.
- the type of synchronization source of UE#1 may be Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, terminal devices synchronized to the GNSS, NR network equipment, terminal devices synchronized to the NR base station equipment, LTE base station equipment , A device synchronized to the LTE base station device.
- GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
- terminal devices synchronized to the GNSS may be Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, terminal devices synchronized to the GNSS, NR network equipment, terminal devices synchronized to the NR base station equipment, LTE base station equipment , A device synchronized to the LTE base station device.
- the type of synchronization source of UE#1 in FIG. 2 may be Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, UE#3 synchronized to GNSS, gNB/eNB, and UE#5 synchronized to gNB/eNB.
- GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
- UE#3 synchronized to GNSS
- gNB/eNB gNode B
- UE#5 synchronized to gNB/eNB.
- Fig. 3 shows a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method provided by the present application.
- the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
- UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1; and/or UE#1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- Manner A#1 UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 may be a ZC sequence or a random sequence.
- the sequence parameters of the reference signal RS#1 include at least one of the following: the initial value of the sequence of the reference signal RS#1, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
- UE#1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate or carry synchronization information.
- UE#1 may only be a device that transmits a side link synchronization signal SLSS (Sidelink Synchronization Signal), or UE#1 may only be a device that does not transmit SLSS.
- SLSS Sidelink Synchronization Signal
- UE#1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE#1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE#1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- Manner A#2 UE#1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the resources here may be any one or more of frequency domain resources and time domain resources.
- UE#1 determines the subcarrier of the reference signal RS#1 in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
- PRB physical resource block
- the position of RS#1 in the PRB can be used to indicate different states or values of synchronization information.
- the transmit power on RS#1 is higher than the power of the subcarrier occupied by data or control information by a preset value.
- This preset value may be indicated by signaling, or pre-configured or predefined. For example, this preset value is 1, 2 or 3dB.
- UE#1 determines the symbol position of the reference signal RS#1 in the time slot according to the synchronization information.
- the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device.
- UE#1 sends the reference signal RS#1 to UE#2.
- RS#1 may be multiple reference signals RS of the same type in the same time slot, or multiple reference signals of different types in the same time slot.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be a DMRS used when UE#1 transmits data, and/or a DMRS used for control information when UE#1 transmits scheduling data.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be a reference signal RS that is sent together when UE#1 sends scheduling data, including PT-RS, CSI-RS, or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be the RS separately transmitted when the UE#1 has no data transmission, including: PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH. It can also be PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH carried in the data transmission slot.
- UE#1 determines that the sequence length of reference signal RS#1 is greater than a first preset value, or UE#1 determines that the reference signal RS#1 The bandwidth is greater than the second preset value.
- the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the second terminal device determines the first terminal according to the resource of the first reference signal The synchronization information of the device.
- UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1; and/or UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS#1.
- UE#2 detects the RS carrying synchronization information, and UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 based on detecting the RS sent by UE#1.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains This 1-bit synchronization information.
- UE#2 detects from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4) that UE#1 actually uses Sequence to obtain the 2-bit synchronization information actually transmitted.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- UE#2 determines the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- UE#2 when UE#2 includes a candidate synchronization source (UE#1), UE#2 can determine the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- UE#1 a candidate synchronization source
- UE#2 can determine the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- UE#2 may determine the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1 and the priority information of the synchronization source.
- Table 1 shows priority information #P1 based on GNSS synchronization.
- Table 2 shows priority information #P2 based on gNB/eNB synchronization.
- whether the rule of Table 1 or the rule of Table 2 is specifically used is configured or pre-configured by base station signaling.
- UEs directly synchronized to GNSS have the same priority, and UEs that indirectly synchronized to GNSS have the same priority; or in the foregoing priority information based on gNB/eNB synchronization, directly UEs synchronized to GNSS have the same priority, and UEs synchronized to GNSS indirectly have the same priority.
- the receiver still detects multiple candidate synchronization sources, it selects signal quality (such as Reference Signal Received Power) and/or the received signal
- signal quality such as Reference Signal Received Power
- RSSI Receiveived Signal Strength Indicator
- RSSQ Reference Signal Receiving Quality
- FIG. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application, and the method may be executed by the first terminal device.
- the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
- UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1; and/or UE#1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be a DMRS used when UE#1 transmits data, and a DMRS used for control information when UE#1 transmits scheduling data.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be a reference signal RS that is sent together when UE#1 sends scheduling data, including PT-RS, CSI-RS, or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be the RS separately transmitted when the UE#1 has no data transmission, including: PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
- UE#1 may determine the parameters of the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to at least one item in the synchronization information, and UE#1 may determine that the reference signal RS#1 is physically located according to at least one item in the synchronization information.
- UE#1 may determine the subcarrier of reference signal RS#1 in the physical resource block according to the value of the synchronization information.
- the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device.
- UE#1 sends the reference signal RS#1 to UE#2.
- UE#1 determines that UE#1 supports synchronization based on the reference signal.
- whether to support synchronization based on reference signals may be a capability of the UE. If the UE's capability does not support synchronization based on reference signals, UE#1 does not transmit the RS carrying synchronization information. If the UE's capability supports synchronization based on reference signals, UE#1 can send RSs carrying synchronization information.
- the UE sends to the network device whether it supports the UE capability based on the reference signal.
- UE#1 determines that the sequence length of reference signal RS#1 is greater than a first preset value, or UE#1 determines that the reference signal RS#1 The bandwidth is greater than the second preset value.
- the first preset value and the second preset value may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be pre-configured.
- the signaling indicated by the network device may be a system message or a radio resource control RRC message.
- UE#1 sends scheduling allocation SA information to UE#2, and the scheduling allocation SA information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of UE#1; or, the scheduling allocation SA information
- the cyclic redundancy check code is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the cyclic redundancy check code may be RNTI (Radio Network Tempory Identity: Radio Network Temporary Identity) or a mask used on CRC.
- the so-called mask refers to the use of a predefined code string of length L and CRC modulo 2 addition on the CRC check bit of length L.
- L is an integer, such as 8, 16, 24, 32, etc., which is not limited in this application.
- the receiver can detect the CRC mask by trying different CRC masks to obtain the corresponding synchronization information.
- UE#1 sends data #D1 to UE#2, and the cyclic redundancy check code of the data #D1 is used to indicate synchronization information of UE#1.
- the reference signal RS#1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data #D1 are located in the same time slot; or, the reference signal RS#1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data# D1 is located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
- UE#1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate synchronization information, UE#1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE#1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
- UE#1 can only send a reference signal carrying synchronization information in an asynchronous time slot.
- UE#1 when UE#1 is a device for sending a synchronization signal, UE#1 sends a reference signal carrying synchronization information in an asynchronous time slot, and sends an SLSS in a synchronization time slot.
- UE#1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE#1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE#1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- Fig. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
- the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device.
- UE#2 receives the reference signal RS#1 from UE#1.
- UE#2 determines that UE#2 supports synchronization based on the reference signal.
- whether to support synchronization based on reference signals may be a capability of the UE. If the UE's capability does not support synchronization based on reference signals, UE#2 does not receive the RS carrying synchronization information. If the UE's capability supports synchronization based on reference signals, UE#2 can receive the RS carrying synchronization information.
- the UE sends to the network device whether it supports the UE capability based on the reference signal.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or, the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of a terminal device.
- UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1; and/or UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS#1.
- UE#2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the received different RSs.
- UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 sent by UE#1.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- UE#2 determines the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information and priority information of UE#1.
- UE#2 may determine the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- UE#2 may determine the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1 and the priority information of the synchronization source.
- UE#2 when UE#2 detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE#3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE#1 at the same time, UE#2 can select the synchronization source according to priority information #P3.
- any of the following methods can be used to determine the priority between the SLSS and the first reference signal relationship:
- the priorities of the first terminal device and the third terminal device are the same;
- the first terminal device When the number of hops synchronized by the third terminal device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, the first terminal device has a higher priority than the third terminal device;
- the first terminal device When the number of hops synchronized by the third terminal device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, the first terminal device has a lower priority than the third terminal device;
- the first terminal device determines the priorities of the first terminal device and the third terminal device according to the pre-configuration information .
- the pre-configuration information may be indicated by the network device or pre-configured.
- the pre-configuration information is used to indicate which priority is higher for the first terminal device and the third terminal device with the same number of hops.
- Table 3 shows priority information #P3 based on reference signal synchronization.
- UE#1 when the number of hops for UE#3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE#1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE#1 has a lower priority than UE#3. As in the example in Table 3B.
- Fig. 6 shows a schematic interaction diagram of another communication method provided by the present application.
- the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
- UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1; and/or UE#1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the first terminal device sends the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information to the second terminal device.
- UE#1 sends reference signal RS#1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information to UE#2.
- UE#1 may use transmission sequences on multiple DMRS symbols of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
- long sequences corresponding to sequences on multiple DMRS symbols may be used to indicate synchronization information.
- data #D1 has M columns of DMRS, where the DMRS length is L, and the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 carrying synchronization information is kL, where k ⁇ M.
- a sequence of length kL to indicate synchronization information
- the sequence of length kL is truncated into k sequences of length L to generate k DMRS symbols.
- a sequence of length 24 is used to indicate synchronization information
- the sequence of length 24 is truncated into two sequences of length 12 to generate 2 DMRS symbols.
- a sequence on k adjacent DMRS symbols in the time domain carrying multiple DMRS symbols on the time slot may be used to indicate synchronization information. For example: when there are 3 (or 4) DMRSs carried on the data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
- multiple DMRSs in the time slot can be divided into different subgroups, respectively indicating the same part or different parts of the synchronization information.
- the part here may be the same certain type or types of specific synchronization information in the synchronization information, and may also be the same bits in the same type of synchronization information.
- S1, S2, S3, S4 in data #D1 can be used to indicate the same or different synchronization information respectively.
- the second terminal device receives the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information from the first terminal device.
- the reference signal RS#1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data #D1 are located in the same time slot; or, the reference signal RS#1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data# D1 is located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal The synchronization information of the device.
- UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1; and/or UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS#1.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- UE#2 determines the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- Fig. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
- the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
- UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1; and/or UE#1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the first terminal device sends the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information to the second terminal device.
- UE#1 sends reference signal RS#1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information to UE#2.
- UE#1 may use transmission sequences on multiple DMRS symbols of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
- long sequences corresponding to sequences on multiple DMRS symbols may be used to indicate synchronization information.
- data #D1 has M columns of DMRS, where the DMRS length is L, and the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 carrying synchronization information is kL, where k ⁇ M.
- a sequence of length kL to indicate synchronization information
- the sequence of length kL is truncated into k sequences of length L to generate k DMRS symbols.
- a sequence of length 24 is used to indicate synchronization information
- the sequence of length 24 is truncated into two sequences of length 12 to generate 2 DMRS symbols.
- a sequence on k adjacent DMRS symbols in the time domain carrying multiple DMRS symbols on the time slot may be used to indicate synchronization information. For example: when there are 3 (or 4) DMRSs carried on the data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
- multiple DMRSs in the time slot can be divided into different subgroups, respectively indicating the same part or different parts of the synchronization information.
- the part here may be the same certain type or types of specific synchronization information in the synchronization information, and may also be the same bits in the same type of synchronization information.
- S1, S2, S3, S4 in data #D1 can be used to indicate the same or different synchronization information respectively.
- Fig. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
- the terminal device may use the same type of reference signal or different types of reference signals to indicate synchronization information.
- the generation sequence of the DMRS on the data and the DMRS on the control information SA can be used at the same time to indicate the synchronization information.
- the indicated synchronization information may be the same or different.
- the second terminal device receives the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information from the first terminal device.
- UE#2 receives reference signal RS#1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information, and/or CSI-RS, and or PT-RS from UE#1.
- UE#1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE#1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals.
- the reference signal RS#1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data #D1 are located in the same time slot; or, the reference signal RS#1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data# D1 is located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or, the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of a terminal device.
- UE#2 obtains synchronization information, and/or CSI-RS, and or PT-RS of UE#1 according to the DMRS of data #D1 and the DMRS of the scheduling allocation SA information.
- UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information.
- UE#2 receives data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information from UE#1; UE#2 obtains UE#1's data according to the DMRS of data #D1 and the DMRS of the scheduling allocation SA information. Synchronization information; or UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the SA information of the scheduling allocation.
- the synchronization information obtained above may be the same part of the same part of the same information, or may be a different part of the same synchronization information.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- UE#2 can detect the reference signals sent from UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7. Therefore, when UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 meet the preset conditions, UE# 1. UE#3 and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- UE#2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent from UE#1 (or UE#3, UE#7); when UE#1, UE#3, UE#7 meet preset conditions At this time, UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- the above-mentioned preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 is checked correctly; the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information is checked correctly; reference signal RS# The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbol of 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the second preset value.
- the terminal device detected by UE#2 serves as the synchronization source, at least one of the following conditions needs to be met: the cyclic redundancy check code of the data is verified correctly; the cycle of the control information SA The redundancy check is correct; the bandwidth occupied by the symbols of the reference signal is greater than the first preset value; the length of the first reference signal sequence is greater than the second preset value.
- UE#2 determines the candidate synchronization source of UE#2 according to the aforementioned conditions, or UE#2 determines whether the detected RS is valid according to the aforementioned conditions. For example, when the SA detection of UE#2 is correct, the data #D1 bears the corresponding RS#1 availability, that is, the data #D1 detected by UE#2 meets the reliability requirement.
- Fig. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
- the second terminal device detects the signal quality of the first reference signal sent from the first terminal device.
- UE#2 detects the signal quality of the reference signal RS#1.
- the second terminal device determines that the first terminal device is a candidate synchronization source.
- UE#2 uses UE#1 as the candidate synchronization source.
- UE#2 uses UE#1 as the candidate synchronization source.
- this preset threshold may be indicated by signaling, or may be pre-configured or predefined.
- the signal quality on the RS detected by UE#2 is greater than the second signal quality threshold, it can be directly used as a candidate synchronization source.
- UE#2 selects the one with the best signal quality that meets the above three conditions as the candidate synchronization source.
- the signal quality includes at least one of the following: for example, Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), and Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ). ).
- RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
- RSSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information and the priority information of the candidate synchronization source.
- UE#2 determines the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the synchronization information of UE#1 and the priority information of candidate synchronization sources.
- UE#2 detects the signal quality of the reference signal RS#1; when the signal quality of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the first threshold, UE#2 uses UE#1 as the candidate synchronization source; UE#2 Determine the synchronization source of UE#2 according to the candidate synchronization source.
- UE#2 of the UE has no synchronization signal reception capability, and the UE only determines the synchronization source in the detected RS.
- FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
- the second terminal device receives the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information from the first terminal device.
- UE#2 receives reference signal RS#1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information from UE#1.
- UE#2 detects the reference signal RS#1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent by UE#1, where the scheduling allocation SA information is that when UE#1 sends data #D1, it is used to indicate data #D1. Control information.
- the second terminal device determines that the first terminal device is a candidate synchronization source.
- UE#2 can detect the reference signals sent from UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7. Therefore, when UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 meet the preset conditions, UE# 1. UE#3 and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- UE#2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent from UE#1 (or UE#3, UE#7); when UE#1, UE#3, UE#7 meet preset conditions At this time, UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- the above-mentioned preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 is checked correctly; the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information is checked correctly; reference signal RS# The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbol of 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the second preset value.
- the terminal device detected by UE#2 serves as the synchronization source, at least one of the following conditions needs to be met: the cyclic redundancy check code of the data is verified correctly; the cycle of the control information SA The redundancy check is correct; the bandwidth occupied by the symbols of the reference signal is greater than the first preset value; the length of the first reference signal sequence is greater than the second preset value.
- UE#2 determines the candidate synchronization source of UE#2 according to the aforementioned conditions, or UE#2 determines whether the detected RS is valid according to the aforementioned conditions. For example, when the SA detection of UE#2 is correct, the data #D1 bears the corresponding RS#1 availability, that is, the data #D1 detected by UE#2 meets the reliability requirement.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information and the priority information of the candidate synchronization source.
- FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
- data #D1 carries 2 DMRSs (RS1, RS2) of length L1, and there are n DMRSs of length L2 on SA, then the length of the DMRS indicating synchronization information is: (2*L1+n *L2).
- FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
- Data #D1 carries 4 DMRS symbols: RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, these DMRS can be divided into 2 parts ⁇ RS1, RS2 ⁇ , ⁇ RS3, RS4 ⁇ , of which ⁇ RS1, RS2 ⁇ , ⁇ RS3, RS4 ⁇
- the indicated synchronization information can be the same or different.
- ⁇ RS1, RS2 ⁇ may indicate synchronization information #1
- ⁇ RS3, RS4 ⁇ may indicate synchronization information #2.
- FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of the sequence of the reference signal of the present application.
- data #D1 When multiple DMRSs are carried on data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
- data #D1 bears 3 DMRS symbols: RS1, RS2, RS3, and synchronization information can be mapped on two adjacent symbols ⁇ RS1, RS2 ⁇ .
- Fig. 14 shows the resource mapping manner of the reference signal of the present application on the PRS.
- the frequency domain position set in each RB where the RS is located may be used to indicate synchronization information, where different mapping modes of the RS in the frequency domain indicate different synchronization information.
- the mapping mode #1 represents 0, and the mapping mode #2 represents 1, to indicate 2-bit synchronization information.
- Mapping mode #1 and mapping mode #2 respectively include two columns of RS.
- the interval of the RS in the frequency domain is 4, there can be a total of 4 mapping methods, which are represented as 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively. These 4 values can indicate 2-bit synchronization information.
- each group when there are 4 columns of RSs, they can be divided into 2 groups, and each group respectively indicates 1 or 2 bits of synchronization information in the above manner.
- the indicated synchronization information can be the same or different.
- UE#1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1, and UE#1 can indicate the synchronization information of UE#1 in the following manner:
- UE#1 may use the sequence on multiple DMRS symbols of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
- data #D1 has M columns of DMRS, where the DMRS length is L, and the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 carrying synchronization information is kL, where k ⁇ M.
- the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
- DMRS symbols RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4 in data #D1 when there are multiple DMRS symbols RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4 in data #D1, ⁇ RS1, RS2 ⁇ and ⁇ RS3, RS4 ⁇ can be used to indicate different synchronization information respectively.
- the DMRS of the data #D1 and the DMRS of the scheduling allocation SA information of the scheduling data #D1 are used to indicate jointly.
- the length of the DMRS indicating synchronization information is: (k*L1+n*L2).
- the DMRS, PTRS or CSI-RS together indicate synchronization information.
- the length of the DMRS indicating synchronization information is: (k*L1+n*L3).
- kL1 to indicate synchronization information #1
- nL3 to indicate synchronization information #2.
- these DMRS can be divided into two parts, and the RS in the first part is the same or different from the RS in the second part to indicate 1-bit synchronization information.
- data #D1 carries 2 DMRS, RS1 and RS2 are the same or different, indicating 1-bit synchronization information.
- ⁇ RS1, RS2 ⁇ and ⁇ RS3, RS4 ⁇ are the same or different to indicate 1-bit synchronization information.
- RS1 and RS2 are the same or different to indicate 1-bit synchronization information #1; RS3 and RS4 are the same or different to indicate the same 1-bit synchronization information# 1.
- the frequency domain position set in each RB where the RS is located may be used to indicate synchronization information, where different mapping modes of the RS in the frequency domain represent different information.
- mapping mode #1 represents 0, and mapping mode #1 represents 1.
- these 2 values can represent 2-bit synchronization information.
- the interval of the RS in the frequency domain is 4, there can be a total of 4 mapping methods, which are represented as 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively. These 4 values can indicate 2-bit synchronization information.
- each group when there are 4 columns of RSs, they can be divided into 2 groups, and each group respectively indicates 1 or 2 bits of synchronization information in the above manner.
- the indicated synchronization information can be the same or different.
- cyclic redundancy check cyclic redundancy check, CRC
- the scrambling sequence string or bit string or scrambling mask used for different scrambling corresponds to a state of synchronization information.
- the indicated synchronization information has n bits, there are a total of 2 n CRC scrambling methods.
- UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1, including:
- r(m) is the sequence of the reference signal on a certain RE
- c() is the random sequence.
- Example 1 Cinit is to generate a random sequence, which can be generated from synchronization information.
- I the number of time slots ⁇ under the corresponding subcarrier interval in the radio frame
- i x is synchronization information
- a, b, c, d are integers It is the identification of the synchronization signal.
- Cinit is to generate a random sequence, which can be generated from synchronization information and synchronization signal identification and/or cell identification.
- I the number of timeslots ⁇ in the corresponding subcarrier interval in the radio frame
- i x is synchronization information
- a, b, c, d are integers
- N PCID is the cell identifier
- Cinit is to generate a random sequence, which can be generated by synchronization information and synchronization information identification, and/or generated by a preset synchronization identification, and/or generated by the source or destination identification indicated in the control information, for example:
- the identifier carried in the SA can be any of the following: the identifier of UE#1, the identifier of UE#2, the source identifier, the destination identifier, and the combined identifier of the source identifier and the destination identifier. Further, It can be the identifier of UE#1, the identifier of UE#2, the source identifier, the destination identifier, all the identifiers or the identifiers corresponding to some fields in the combined identifier of the source identifier and the destination identifier.
- Cinit is the initial value of the random sequence
- ix is all or part of the synchronization information to be transmitted
- mod represents the remainder operation.
- the cyclic shift and root sequence number of the sequence may be generated from synchronization information and synchronization information identification, and/or generated from a certain preset synchronization identification, and/or source or destination identification indicated in the control information.
- this embodiment can be used for RS generated by ZC sequence.
- M represents the maximum number of root sequences supported, such as 30 or the length of the sequence L; u is the root sequence number of the ZC sequence. f(x) is a function of synchronization information x.
- f(x) x
- the value of x can be 0, 1, 2, 3, etc.
- N represents the length of the sequence to be transmitted
- h(x) is a function based on the above parameters
- h(x) can be defined in a manner similar to the function f(x).
- h(x) a*x, a is a non-zero integer.
- h(x) a+bx, a and b are non-zero integers.
- the orthogonal cover code OCC used when generating the sequence the length of the OCC is determined by the symbol of the RS in the time domain.
- the orthogonal cover code OCC used in the sequence may be generated from synchronization information and synchronization information identification, and/or generated from a certain preset synchronization identification, and/or source or destination identification indicated in the control information.
- UE#1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate synchronization information, UE#1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE#1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
- UE#1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE#1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE#1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- UE#2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the received different RSs.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 10 provided by an embodiment of the application.
- the device 10 may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be set in a terminal device.
- the device 10 may include a processing unit 11 and a storage unit 12.
- the storage unit 12 is used to store instructions
- the processing unit 11 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 12, so that the device 10 implements the steps performed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned method.
- the device 10 may also include an input port 13 and an output port 14.
- the processing unit 11, the storage unit 12, the input port 13 and the output port 14 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals.
- the storage unit 12 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 11 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 12 to control the input port 13 to receive signals and the output port 14 to send signals to complete the above method Steps for terminal equipment.
- the storage unit 12 can be integrated in the processing unit 11 or can be provided separately from the processing unit 11.
- the input port 13 is a receiver, and the output port 14 is a transmitter.
- the receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively called a transceiver. If the device 10 is a chip or a circuit, the input port 13 is an input interface, and the output port 14 is an output interface.
- the device 10 may be used as a device for sending reference signals, or a device for sending reference signals, control information, and/or data.
- the method steps performed by the device 10 as a sending device are described in detail below.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the device 10, and/or the processing unit 11 determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10; and/or the processing unit 11 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
- Manner A#1 The processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate synchronization information, the device 10 may be a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the device 10 may not send a synchronization signal. Device.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate or carry synchronization information.
- the device 10 may only be a device that transmits a sidelink synchronization signal SLSS (Sidelink Synchronization Signal), or the device 10 may only be a device that does not transmit an SLSS.
- SLSS Sidelink Synchronization Signal
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the sequence of the reference signal sent by the device 10 when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by the device 10 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and the device 10 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and the device 10 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- Manner A#2 The processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
- the resources here may be any one or more of frequency domain resources and time domain resources.
- the processing unit 11 determines the subcarrier of the reference signal RS#1 in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
- the processing unit 11 determines the symbol position of the reference signal RS#1 in the time slot according to the synchronization information.
- the device 10 transmits the first reference signal to the second terminal device (for example, the aforementioned UE#2).
- the device 10 (for example, the aforementioned UE#1) sends the reference signal RS#1 to the UE#2.
- RS#1 may be multiple reference signals RS of the same type in the same time slot, or multiple reference signals of different types in the same time slot.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be a DMRS used when the device 10 transmits data, and/or a DMRS used for control information when the device 10 transmits scheduling data.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be a reference signal RS that is sent together when the device 10 sends scheduling data, including PT-RS, CSI-RS, or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
- the reference signal RS#1 may be an RS separately transmitted by the device 10 when no data is transmitted, including: PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH. It can also be PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH carried in the data transmission slot.
- the device 10 determines that the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the first preset value, or the device 10 determines that the bandwidth of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the first preset value. Two preset values.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the processing unit 11 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the resource of the first reference signal; the output port 14 is used to send the first reference signal to the second terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, the first terminal The number of synchronization hops between the synchronization source of the device and the satellite, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment.
- UE#1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate synchronization information, UE#1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE#1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
- UE#1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE#1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE#1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the parameters of the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information, and the parameters include at least one of the following parameters One item: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the subcarrier of the first reference signal in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information and the synchronization signal identifier used by the first device At least one of the following parameters: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
- the processing unit 11 of the apparatus 10 may determine the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the number of symbols in the time slot in which the first reference signal is carried; and/or the processing unit 11 is specifically configured to determine the first reference signal according to the bandwidth of the first reference signal. The sequence length of the reference signal.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines to send the first reference signal according to the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal.
- UE#1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS#1 to indicate synchronization information, UE#1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE#1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
- UE#1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE#2.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE#1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE#1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE#2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
- UE#2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the received different RSs.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
- the processing unit 11 determines that the sequence length of the first reference signal is greater than the first preset value; or the processing unit 11 determines that the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than The second preset value.
- the output port 14 of the device 10 is also used to send first control information to the second terminal device, the first control information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device; or, the cycle of the first control information
- the redundancy check code is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the output port 14 of the device 10 is also used to send the first data to the second terminal device, and the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the processing unit 11 determines that the first terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- the device 10 may be used as a device for receiving reference signals, or a device for receiving reference signals, control information and/or data.
- the method steps performed by the device 10 as a receiving device are described in detail below.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the reference signal RS#1 from the first terminal device (for example, the aforementioned UE#1).
- the processing unit 11 determines that the device 10 supports synchronization based on the reference signal.
- whether to support synchronization based on reference signals may be a capability of the UE. If the UE's capabilities do not support synchronization based on reference signals, the device 10 does not receive RSs carrying synchronization information. If the UE's capability supports synchronization based on the reference signal, the device 10 can receive the RS carrying synchronization information.
- the apparatus 10 sends to the network device whether it supports the UE capability based on the reference signal.
- the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or, the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of a terminal device.
- the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of the UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1; and/or the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of the UE#1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS#1.
- the device 10 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the received different RSs.
- the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of the UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 sent by the UE#1.
- the device 10 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains the 1 bit. Synchronization information.
- the device 10 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the four candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), and obtains To the 2-bit synchronization information actually transmitted.
- RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4 candidate synchronization sequences
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization source of the device 10 according to the synchronization information and priority information of the UE#1.
- the device 10 may determine the synchronization source of the device 10 according to the synchronization information of UE#1.
- the device 10 may determine the synchronization source of the device 10 according to the synchronization information of UE#1 and the priority information of the synchronization source.
- the device 10 when the device 10 detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE#3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE#1 at the same time, the device 10 can select the synchronization source according to the priority information #P3 in Table 3A.
- UE#1 when the number of hops for UE#3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE#1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE#1 has a lower priority than UE#3. As in the example in Table 3B.
- the processing unit 11 determines that the second terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device; the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the processing unit 11 Determine the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal; the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: The type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops of the path from which the first terminal device is synchronized to the synchronization source, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to a satellite or network device, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network device.
- UE#2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the received different RSs.
- UE#2 obtains the synchronization information of UE#1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 sent by UE#1.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
- UE#2 detects the sequence actually used by UE#1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resources of the first reference signal, including: the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the subcarriers of the first reference signal in the physical resource block .
- the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device and the priority information of the synchronization source Synchronization source.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 is also used to detect the signal quality of the first reference signal; when the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than the first threshold, the processing unit 11 uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 receives first data and/or first control information from a first terminal device; when the first terminal device meets a preset condition, the processing unit 11 uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source;
- the preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is checked correctly; or, the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is checked correctly; or, the first reference
- the bandwidth of the signal is greater than the first preset value.
- UE#2 can detect the reference signals sent from UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7. Therefore, when UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 meet the preset conditions, UE# 1. UE#3 and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- UE#2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent from UE#1 (or UE#3, UE#7); when UE#1, UE#3, UE#7 meet preset conditions At this time, UE#1, UE#3, and UE#7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE#2.
- the above-mentioned preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 is checked correctly; the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information is checked correctly; reference signal RS# The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbol of 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS#1 is greater than the second preset value.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 is also used to receive first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device; the processing unit 11 determines the first terminal device according to the DMRS of the first data and the DMRS of the first control information Or the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information.
- the input port 13 of the device 10 detects the side link synchronization signal sent by the third device, and the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the first priority information (Table 3).
- the processing unit 11 determines that the second terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- the functions of the input port 13 and the output port 14 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
- the processing unit 11 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
- a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the program codes that realize the functions of the processing unit 11, the input port 13 and the output port 14 are stored in the storage unit 12.
- the general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 11, the input port 13 and the output port 14 by executing the code in the storage unit 12 .
- FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 20 provided by this application.
- the foregoing apparatus 20 may be configured in the terminal device 20, or the apparatus 20 itself may be the terminal device 20.
- the terminal device 20 can execute the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
- FIG. 16 only shows the main components of the terminal device.
- the terminal device 20 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
- the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment The described action.
- the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above embodiments.
- the control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
- the control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
- the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
- the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
- the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
- FIG. 16 only shows a memory and a processor. In actual terminal devices, there may be multiple processors and memories.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
- the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
- the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data.
- the processor in FIG. 16 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
- the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as buses.
- the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
- the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
- the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
- the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
- the antenna and control circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 201 of the terminal device 20, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 202 of the terminal device 20.
- the terminal device 20 includes a transceiver unit 201 and a processing unit 202.
- the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on.
- the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 201 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
- the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
- the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
- the device is a communication chip
- the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
- the apparatus is a communication device
- the communication device may include a device for sending information or data and a device for receiving information or data.
- the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
- the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
- each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
- Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
The present application sets forth a communication method and a terminal device, the method comprising: a first terminal device determining, in accordance with synchronization information of said first terminal device, a first reference signal sequence, and/or, the first terminal device determining, in accordance with synchronization information of said first terminal device, resources used for sending a first reference signal; the first terminal device sending the first reference signal to a second terminal device; wherein, the synchronization information comprising at least one of the following information items: a type of synchronization source of the first terminal device; a hop count from the first terminal device to a satellite or to a network device; whether the first terminal device directly synchronizes to the satellite or to the network device; whether the first terminal device is within the coverage range of a network device. The communication method and terminal device of the present application may be applied in an Internet of Vehicles, for instance V2X, LTE-V, NR-V, V2V, etc., and enhance terminal device synchronization efficiency.
Description
本申请要求于2019年03月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910252643.8、申请名称为“通信的方法和终端装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201910252643.8, and the application name is "Communication Method and Terminal Device" on March 29, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,具体涉及一种通信的方法、终端装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and terminal device.
设备到设备(device to device,D2D)通信、车与车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)通信、车与行人(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)通信或车与基建/网络(vehicle to infrastructure/network,V2I/N)通信是终端设备(terminal device)之间直接进行通信的技术,车到车(vehicle to-Vehicle,V2V)、车到基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)、车到行人(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)等统称为V2X(vehicle to everything,V2X),即车与任何事物相通信。Device-to-device (D2D) communication, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P) communication, or vehicle-to-infrastructure/network (V2I/ N) Communication is a technology for direct communication between terminal devices, vehicle to vehicle (V2V), vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to pedestrian (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P) are collectively referred to as V2X (vehicle to everything, V2X), that is, the vehicle communicates with everything.
D2D、V2X通信需要在通信的终端设备之间实现同步,当通信的UE能够直接检测到网络或GNSS时,UE的最佳策略是同步到这些设备。当UE检测不到网络或GNSS时,UE可以同步到发送同步信号的同步源UE上。然而,为了控制系统开销,同步信号的发送周期通常会比较长,例如,LTE-V2X同步信号的周期即为160ms。在这种情况下,如果UE漏检或错过同步信号,会增加设备获得定时和锁定频率的时间,从而影响通信的性能。因此,如何提高终端装置的信号同步效率成为亟待解决的重要问题。D2D and V2X communication needs to achieve synchronization between communicating terminal devices. When the communicating UE can directly detect the network or GNSS, the best strategy for the UE is to synchronize to these devices. When the UE cannot detect the network or GNSS, the UE can synchronize to the synchronization source UE that sends the synchronization signal. However, in order to control the system overhead, the transmission period of the synchronization signal is usually relatively long. For example, the period of the LTE-V2X synchronization signal is 160 ms. In this case, if the UE misses the detection or misses the synchronization signal, it will increase the time for the device to obtain the timing and lock the frequency, thereby affecting the communication performance. Therefore, how to improve the signal synchronization efficiency of the terminal device has become an important issue to be solved urgently.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种通信的方法和终端装置,可以提高终端装置信号同步的效率。The present application provides a communication method and terminal device, which can improve the efficiency of signal synchronization of the terminal device.
第一方面,提供了一种通信的方法,包括:第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源;所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号;其中,所述同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:所述第一终端装置的同步源的类型、所述第一终端装置与卫星或网络设备之间的跳数、所述第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、所述第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a first terminal device determines a sequence of a first reference signal according to synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or, the first terminal device determines a sequence of a first reference signal according to the first terminal device The synchronization information of the device determines the resource used to send the first reference signal; the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: The type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops between the first terminal device and the satellite or network equipment, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, whether the first terminal device In the coverage of network equipment.
在本申请实施例中,第一终端装置可以使用生成第一参考信号的序列的参数来指示或携带同步信息。可选地,第一终端装置可以仅是发送侧行链路同步信号SLSS(sidelink synchronization signal)的装置,或者第一终端装置可以仅是不发送SLSS的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may use the parameters of the sequence of generating the first reference signal to indicate or carry synchronization information. Optionally, the first terminal device may only be a device that transmits a sidelink synchronization signal SLSS (sidelink synchronization signal), or the first terminal device may only be a device that does not transmit an SLSS.
例如,第一终端装置可以使用生成参考信号(reference signal,RS)的序列的参数来指示同步信息,第一终端装置可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者第一终端装置可以是不发送同步信号的装置。For example, the first terminal device may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal (RS) to indicate the synchronization information, the first terminal device may be a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the first terminal device may not send a synchronization signal Device.
第一终端装置根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向第二终端装置发送相应的RS。The first terminal device uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to the second terminal device.
例如,当第一终端装置发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2,第一终端装置根据待传输的同步信息向第二终端装置发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by the first terminal device is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and the first terminal device sends RS1 or RS2 to the second terminal device according to the synchronization information to be transmitted. .
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,第一终端装置根据待传输的同步信息向第二终端装置发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, and the first terminal device sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to the second terminal device according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置的同步信息用于所述第二终端装置确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the synchronization information of the first terminal device is used by the second terminal device to determine the synchronization source of the second terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,包括:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息确定所述第一参考信号的序列的参数,所述参数包括以下参数中的至少一项:所述第一参考信号的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码(orthogonal cover code,OCC)、序列长度。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first terminal device determining the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device includes: The synchronization information determines a parameter of the sequence of the first reference signal, and the parameter includes at least one of the following parameters: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, Orthogonal cover code (OCC) and sequence length of the sequence.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息确定所述第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first terminal device determining the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device includes: the first terminal device according to The synchronization information determines the subcarrier of the first reference signal in the physical resource block.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,包括:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息和所述第一设备使用的同步信号标识确定所述第一参考信号的序列的参数中的以下至少一项:所述第一参考信号的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码OCC、序列长度。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first terminal device determining the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device includes: the first terminal device according to the synchronization information Information and the synchronization signal identifier used by the first device to determine at least one of the following parameters of the sequence of the first reference signal: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, and the cyclic shift of the sequence Bit value, sequence orthogonal cover code OCC, sequence length.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第一终端装置根据承载所述第一参考信号所在时隙中的符号数确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度;和/或,所述第一终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的带宽确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device determines the first reference signal according to the number of symbols in the time slot in which the first reference signal is carried And/or, the first terminal device determines the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the bandwidth of the first reference signal.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息与所述第一参考信号的资源映射方式确定所述发送第一参考信号的资源;其中,所述同步信息与所述第一参考信号的资源映射方式,包括:所述同步信息映射在所述第一参考信号所在时隙的相邻两个符号上;所述第一参考信号所在时隙包括至少两个符号。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first terminal device determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the first terminal The apparatus determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal; wherein the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal includes: The synchronization information is mapped on two adjacent symbols of the time slot where the first reference signal is located; the time slot where the first reference signal is located includes at least two symbols.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述同步源的类型包括以下中的至少一种:全球导航卫星系统GNSS、同步到所述GNSS的终端装置、NR网络设备、同步到所述NR基站设备的终端装置、LTE基站设备、同步到所述LTE基站设备的设备。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the type of the synchronization source includes at least one of the following: Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, terminal devices synchronized to the GNSS, NR network equipment, synchronization Terminal devices to the NR base station equipment, LTE base station equipment, and equipment synchronized to the LTE base station equipment.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一参考信号包括以下参考信号中的任一种:用于控制信道的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)、用于数据信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于广播信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于反馈信道的参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)、相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PT-RS)。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first reference signal includes any one of the following reference signals: a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) used for control channels, Demodulation reference signal DMRS for data channel, demodulation reference signal DMRS for broadcast channel, reference signal for feedback channel, channel state information reference signal (channel state information-reference signal, CSI-RS), phase tracking reference Signal (phase tracking reference signal, PT-RS).
例如,对于不同类型的参考信号,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1发送数据时使用的 DMRS、和/或UE#1发送调度数据时的控制信息的DMRS。For example, for different types of reference signals, the reference signal RS# 1 may be the DMRS used when UE# 1 transmits data, and/or the DMRS used for control information when UE#1 transmits scheduling data.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,在所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号前,所述方法还包括:所述第一终端装置确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度大于第一预设值;或者所述第一终端装置确定所述第一参考信号的带宽大于第二预设值。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, before the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the method further includes: the first terminal device determines The sequence length of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value; or the first terminal device determines that the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a second preset value.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息;或者,所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends first control information to the second terminal device, where the first control information is used to indicate Part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device; or, the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第一数据,所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends first data to the second terminal device, and the cyclic redundancy correction of the first data The verification code is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号前,所述方法还包括:所述第一终端装置确定所述第一终端装置支持基于所述第一参考信号的同步。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, before the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the method further includes: the first terminal device determines The first terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一参考信号、所述第一控制信息和/或所述第一数据位于同一个时隙;或者,所述第一参考信号、所述第一控制信息和/或所述第一数据位于时域连续的多个时隙中。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first reference signal, the first control information, and/or the first data are located in the same time slot; or, the first reference The signal, the first control information and/or the first data are located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
第二方面,提供了一种通信的方法,包括:第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号;所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息;所述第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源;其中,所述同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:所述第一终端装置的同步源的类型、所述第一终端装置的同步源与卫星之间的同步跳数、所述第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、所述第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a second terminal device receives a first reference signal from a first terminal device; the second terminal device determines the first reference signal according to a sequence of the first reference signal The synchronization information of the terminal device, and/or the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal; the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the The synchronization information determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, the synchronization source of the first terminal device and The number of synchronization hops between satellites, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment.
在本申请实施例中,第二终端装置可以检测同步信息对应的不同的参考信号(reference signal,RS),第二终端装置根据接收到的不同的RS来获取第一终端装置的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the second terminal device may detect different reference signals (RS) corresponding to the synchronization information, and the second terminal device obtains the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the received different RSs.
例如,第二终端装置根据第一终端装置发送的参考信号RS#1的序列获取第一终端装置的同步信息。For example, the second terminal device acquires the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 transmitted by the first terminal device.
当第一终端装置发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则第二终端装置从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测第一终端装置实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by the first terminal device is 1 bit, the second terminal device detects the sequence actually used by the first terminal device from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2) to obtain Up to this 1-bit synchronization information.
当第一终端装置发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则第二终端装置从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测第一终端装置实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by the first terminal device is 2 bits, the second terminal device detects from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), the actual use of the first terminal device Sequence to obtain the 2-bit synchronization information actually transmitted.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,包括:所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the second terminal device determining synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal includes: the second terminal device The synchronization information of the first terminal device is determined according to the subcarriers of the first reference signal in the physical resource block.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述同步信息用于所述第二终端装置 确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the synchronization information is used by the second terminal device to determine the synchronization source of the second terminal device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源,包括:所述第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the second terminal The device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device and the priority information of the synchronization source.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第二终端装置检测所述第一参考信号的信号质量;当所述第一参考信号的信号质量大于第一阈值时,所述第二终端装置将所述第一终端装置作为候选同步源;所述第二设备根据所述候选同步源确定所述第二设备的同步源。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second terminal device detects the signal quality of the first reference signal; when the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than At the first threshold, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source; the second device determines the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;在所述第一终端装置满足预设条件时,所述第二终端装置将所述第一终端装置作为候选同步源;所述第二设备根据所述候选同步源确定所述第二设备的同步源;其中,所述预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,所述第一参考信号的带宽大于第一预设值。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second terminal device receives the first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device; When the first terminal device satisfies a preset condition, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source; the second device determines the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source; Wherein, the preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is checked correctly; or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is checked correctly Or, the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;所述第二终端装置根据所述第一数据的DMRS和所述第一控制信息的DMRS确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息;或者所述第二终端装置根据所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码、和/或所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second terminal device receiving first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device; The second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the DMRS of the first data and the DMRS of the first control information; or the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the cyclic redundancy calibration of the first data. The verification code and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述第二终端装置检测到第三设备发送的侧行链路同步信号,所述第二终端装置根据第一优先级信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源,所述第一优先级信息包括以下中的任意一种:所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置和所述第三设备的优先级相同;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置相对于所述第三设备具有更高的优先级;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置相对于所述第三设备具有更低的优先级;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置根据预配置信息确定所述第一终端装置和所述第三设备的优先级。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second terminal device detects the side link synchronization signal sent by the third device, and the second terminal device detects A priority information determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device, and the first priority information includes any one of the following: the number of hops that the third device synchronizes to a satellite or a base station and the first terminal device The number of hops synchronized to the satellite or base station is the same, and the priority of the first terminal device and the third device are the same; the number of hops synchronized to the satellite or the base station by the third device is the same as that of the first terminal device to the satellite Or the number of hops of the base station is the same, the first terminal device has a higher priority relative to the third device; the third device is synchronized to the satellite or the number of hops of the base station is synchronized to the satellite Or the number of hops of the base station is the same, the first terminal device has a lower priority relative to the third device; the third device is synchronized to the satellite or the number of hops of the base station is synchronized to the satellite Or the number of hops of the base station is the same, and the first terminal device determines the priorities of the first terminal device and the third device according to pre-configuration information.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号前,所述方法还包括:所述第二终端装置确定所述第二终端装置支持基于所述第一参考信号的同步。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, before the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device, the method further includes: the second terminal device determines the second The terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述同步源的类型包括以下中的至少一种:全球导航卫星系统GNSS、同步到所述GNSS的设备、NR基站设备、同步到所述NR基站设备的设备、LTE基站设备、同步到所述LTE基站设备的设备。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the type of the synchronization source includes at least one of the following: Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, equipment synchronized to the GNSS, NR base station equipment, synchronized to The equipment of the NR base station equipment, the LTE base station equipment, and the equipment synchronized to the LTE base station equipment.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一参考信号包括以下信号中的任一种:控制信道的解调参考信号DMRS、数据信道的解调参考信号DMRS、广播信道的解调参考信号DMRS、反馈信道的参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号PT-RS。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first reference signal includes any one of the following signals: a demodulation reference signal DMRS for a control channel, a demodulation reference signal DMRS for a data channel, and a broadcast Channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, feedback channel reference signal, channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal PT-RS.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一参考信号、所述第一控制信息和/或所述第一数据位于同一个时隙;或者所述第一参考信号、所述第一控制信息和/或所述第一数据位于时域连续的多个时隙中。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first reference signal, the first control information, and/or the first data are located in the same time slot; or the first reference signal , The first control information and/or the first data are located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一终端装置为发送同步信号的装置,或者,所述第一终端装置为不发送同步信号的装置。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first terminal device is a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the first terminal device is a device that does not send a synchronization signal.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述终端装置用于执行第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided, and the terminal device is configured to execute the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect.
具体地,所述终端装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。终端装置可以是网络设备,也可以是终端,也可以是应用于网络设备或终端中的芯片,或者其他具有上述网络设备或终端功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端装置是网络设备或终端时接收模块可以接收器,可以包括天线和射频电路等,处理模块可以是处理器,例如:中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),发送模块可以是发射器,可以包括天线和射频电路等,其中接收器和发射器可以是整合的收发器。当终端装置是具有上述网络设备或终端功能的部件时,接收模块可以是射频单元,处理模块可以是处理器,发送模块可以是射频单元。当终端装置是芯片系统时,接收模块可以是芯片系统的输入端口、处理模块可以是芯片系统的处理器,发送模块可以是芯片系统的输出端口。Specifically, the terminal device may include a module for executing the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect. The terminal device may be a network device, a terminal, a chip applied to a network device or a terminal, or other combination devices, components, etc. having the functions of the network device or terminal. When the terminal device is a network device or terminal, the receiving module may be a receiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc., the processing module may be a processor, for example, a central processing unit (CPU), and the sending module may be a transmitter. It may include antennas and radio frequency circuits, etc., where the receiver and transmitter may be integrated transceivers. When the terminal device is a component with the aforementioned network equipment or terminal function, the receiving module may be a radio frequency unit, the processing module may be a processor, and the sending module may be a radio frequency unit. When the terminal device is a chip system, the receiving module may be an input port of the chip system, the processing module may be a processor of the chip system, and the sending module may be an output port of the chip system.
第四方面,提供一种通信装置,所述终端装置包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器用于存储指令,所述处理器用于执行该存储器存储的指令,并且对所述存储器中存储的指令的执行使得所述处理器执行第一方面或第二方面中任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided. The terminal device includes a memory and a processor, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute instructions stored in the memory, and perform operations on the instructions stored in the memory. Executing causes the processor to execute the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect or the second aspect.
在一种设计中,该装置为通信芯片,通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口,以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。In one design, the device is a communication chip, and the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
在另一种设计中,所述装置为通信设备,通信设备可以包括用于发送信息或数据的,以及用于接收信息或数据的。In another design, the apparatus is a communication device, and the communication device may include a device for sending information or data and a device for receiving information or data.
第五方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, and the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, causing the computer to execute the first aspect to the first aspect. The method in any one of the two possible implementation modes.
图1示出了本申请提供的通信方法的示意性场景图。Fig. 1 shows a schematic scene diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
图2示出了本申请提供的通信方法的示意性场景图。Fig. 2 shows a schematic scene diagram of the communication method provided by the present application.
图3示出了本申请的一种通信方法的示意性交互图。Fig. 3 shows a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method of the present application.
图4示出了本申请的一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of a communication method of the present application.
图5示出了本申请的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method of the present application.
图6示出了本申请的另一种通信方法的示意性交互图。Fig. 6 shows a schematic interaction diagram of another communication method of the present application.
图7示出了本申请的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
图8示出了本申请的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
图9示出了本申请的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
图10示出了本申请的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of yet another communication method of the present application.
图11示出了本申请的参考信号的序列的示意性结构图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
图12示出了本申请的参考信号的序列的示意性结构图。FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
图13示出了本申请的参考信号的序列的示意性结构图。FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of the sequence of the reference signal of the present application.
图14示出了本申请的参考信号的资源的示意性结构图。FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of reference signal resources of the present application.
图15示出了本申请提供的一种终端装置的示意性结构图。FIG. 15 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
图16示出了本申请提供的一种终端装置的示意性结构图。FIG. 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service,GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th Generation,5G)系统或新无线(New Radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) system, Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system, and Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, the future 5th Generation (5th Generation, 5G) system or New Radio (NR), etc.
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, user terminal, terminal, wireless Communication equipment, user agent or user device. The terminal device can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (Wireless Local Loop, WLL) station, a personal digital processing (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), with wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or future evolution of the public land mobile network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) Terminal equipment, etc., this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该网络设备可以是全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)系统或码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)中的基站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等,本申请实施例并不限定。The network device in the embodiment of the application may be a device used to communicate with a terminal device. The network device may be a Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM) system or Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) The base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in the LTE system can also be the base station (NodeB, NB) in the Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system, or the evolutionary base station (Evolutional Base Station) in the LTE system. NodeB, eNB, or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN) scenarios, or the network device can be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, wearable device, and future The network equipment in the 5G network or the network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc., are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中的终端装置可以是网络设备,也可以是终端,也可以是应用于网络设备或终端中的芯片,或者其他具有上述网络设备或终端功能的组合器件、部件等。The terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may be a network device, a terminal, a chip applied to a network device or terminal, or other combination devices or components with the above-mentioned network device or terminal function.
本申请的通信方法可以应用于设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)通信、车与车(Vehicle to Vehicle,V2V)通信、车与行人(Vehicle to Pedestrian,V2P)通信或车与基建/网络(Vehicle to Infrastructure/Network,V2I/N)通信。The communication method of this application can be applied to device to device (D2D) communication, vehicle to vehicle (V2V) communication, vehicle to pedestrian (Vehicle to Pedestrian, V2P) communication, or vehicle to infrastructure/network ( Vehicle to Infrastructure/Network, V2I/N) communication.
D2D、V2X通信需要在通信的终端设备之间实现同步,当通信的终端设备能够直接检测到网络或GNSS时,终端设备的最佳策略是同步到这些设备。当终端设备检测不到网络 或GNSS时,终端设备可以同步到发送同步信号的同步源终端设备上。然而,为了控制系统开销,同步信号的发送周期通常会比较长,例如,LTE-V2X同步信号的周期即为160ms。在这种情况下,如果终端设备漏检或错过同步信号,会增加设备获得定时和锁定频率的时间,从而影响通信的性能。D2D and V2X communication needs to achieve synchronization between communicating terminal devices. When the communicating terminal device can directly detect the network or GNSS, the best strategy for the terminal device is to synchronize to these devices. When the terminal device cannot detect the network or GNSS, the terminal device can synchronize to the synchronization source terminal device that sends the synchronization signal. However, in order to control the system overhead, the transmission period of the synchronization signal is usually relatively long. For example, the period of the LTE-V2X synchronization signal is 160 ms. In this case, if the terminal device misses the detection or misses the synchronization signal, it will increase the time for the device to obtain the timing and lock the frequency, thereby affecting the communication performance.
以下,对本申请涉及的相关术语作简要介绍。Hereinafter, a brief introduction to the relevant terms involved in this application is given.
1、CAZAC序列1. CAZAC sequence
CAZAC(Const Amplitude Zero Auto-Corelation),即恒包络零自相关序列,CAZAC序列特性包括以下特性:1.恒包络特性:任意长度的CAZAC序列幅值恒定。2.理想的周期自相关特性:任意CAZAC序列移位n位后,n不是CAZAC序列的周期的整倍数时,移位后的序列与原序列不相关。3.良好的互相关特性:互相关和部分相关值接近于0。4.低峰均比特性:任意CAZAC序列组成的信号,其峰值与其均值的比值很低。5.傅里叶变换后仍然是CAZAC序列:任意CAZAC序列经过傅里叶正反变化后仍然是CAZAC序列。CAZAC (Const Amplitude Zero Auto-Corelation), namely constant envelope zero auto-correlation sequence, CAZAC sequence characteristics include the following characteristics: 1. Constant envelope characteristics: CAZAC sequence of any length has a constant amplitude. 2. Ideal periodic autocorrelation characteristics: After any CAZAC sequence is shifted by n bits, and n is not an integral multiple of the period of the CAZAC sequence, the shifted sequence is not related to the original sequence. 3. Good cross-correlation characteristics: the cross-correlation and partial correlation values are close to 0. 4. Low peak-to-average ratio: The signal composed of any CAZAC sequence has a very low ratio of its peak value to its average value. 5. CAZAC sequence after Fourier transform: any CAZAC sequence is still CAZAC sequence after Fourier positive and negative changes.
CAZAC序列现在广泛应用于脉冲雷达压缩领域,扩频通信系统(同步CDMA和MC-CDMA),和OFDM系统(LTE和WiMAX)等。CAZAC序列主要包括Zadoff-off序列(即ZC序列)、Frank序列、Golomb多相序列和Chirp序列。CAZAC序列常用于通信系统的同步算法中。其中,ZC序列具有良好的自相关特性和互相关特性,因此被选用为无线通信系统中的导频序列,具体应用于下行链路中的主同步信号(Primary Synchronization Signal,PSS)、上行链路中的参考信号(Reference Signal,RS)和上行链路物理随机接入信道(Physical Random Access Channel,PRACH)中的前导(Preamble)序列。CAZAC sequences are now widely used in the field of pulse radar compression, spread spectrum communication systems (synchronous CDMA and MC-CDMA), and OFDM systems (LTE and WiMAX). CAZAC sequence mainly includes Zadoff-off sequence (ie ZC sequence), Frank sequence, Golomb polyphase sequence and Chirp sequence. CAZAC sequence is often used in synchronization algorithms of communication systems. Among them, the ZC sequence has good auto-correlation and cross-correlation characteristics, so it is selected as the pilot sequence in the wireless communication system, and is specifically applied to the primary synchronization signal (Primary Synchronization Signal, PSS) and uplink in the downlink. Reference Signal (RS) and Preamble (Preamble) sequence in the uplink physical random access channel (Physical Random Access Channel, PRACH).
2、参考信号2. Reference signal
RS(Reference Signal)参考信号即“导频”信号。其中,下行参考信号有2个作用:1,下行信道质量测量;2,下行信道估计,用于终端设备端的相干检测和解调。对于OFDM系统,下行参考信号是以RE为单位的,即一个参考信号占用一个RE(资源粒子)。RS (Reference Signal) reference signal is the "pilot" signal. Among them, the downlink reference signal has two functions: 1. Downlink channel quality measurement; 2. Downlink channel estimation, used for coherent detection and demodulation on the terminal equipment side. For the OFDM system, the downlink reference signal is based on REs, that is, one reference signal occupies one RE (resource element).
在本申请中,为了描述方便,把第一终端装置发送的参考信号简记为RS#1,亦即本申请中提到的第一参考信号。In this application, for the convenience of description, the reference signal sent by the first terminal device is abbreviated as RS# 1, which is the first reference signal mentioned in this application.
例如,参考信号可以分为两列:参考信号#1和参考信号#2,其中,参考信号#1位于0时隙的第一个OFDM符号,参考信号#2位于时隙的倒数第三个OFDM符号。参考信号#1位于第一个OFDM符号有助于下行控制信号被尽早解调。在频域上,每6个子载波插入一个参考信号,这个数值是在信道估计性能和RS开销之间求取平衡的结果,既能在典型频率选择性衰落信道获得良好的信道估计性能,又能将RS控制在较低水平。RS的时域密度是每个时隙插入两行RS。For example, the reference signal can be divided into two columns: reference signal # 1 and reference signal # 2, where reference signal # 1 is located in the first OFDM symbol of slot 0, and reference signal # 2 is located in the third OFDM symbol from the bottom of the slot. symbol. The reference signal # 1 located in the first OFDM symbol helps the downlink control signal to be demodulated as soon as possible. In the frequency domain, a reference signal is inserted every 6 subcarriers. This value is the result of balancing channel estimation performance and RS overhead. It can not only achieve good channel estimation performance in typical frequency selective fading channels, but also Control RS at a low level. The time domain density of RS is that two rows of RS are inserted in each slot.
图1示出了本申请的通信方法的应用场景的示意图。需要说明的是,下面以UE来进行举例,为了描述方便,作为一种简记的描述方式,UE#1,UE#2,UE#3,UE#4,UE#5,UE#6,UE#7中的任意一个或多个,当为发射机时可以认为是第一终端装置、第三终端装置的一种具体示例;当为接收机时可以认为是第二终端装置的一种具体示例。本发明的上述描述,并不构成对第一终端装置、第二终端装置和第三终端装置的范围限制。Figure 1 shows a schematic diagram of an application scenario of the communication method of the present application. It should be noted that the following uses UE as an example. For the convenience of description, as a shorthand description, UE# 1, UE# 2, UE# 3, UE# 4, UE# 5, UE# 6, UE Any one or more of #7 can be considered as a specific example of the first terminal device and the third terminal device when it is a transmitter; it can be considered as a specific example of the second terminal device when it is a receiver . The foregoing description of the present invention does not constitute a limitation on the scope of the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the third terminal device.
如图1所示,本申请的通信方法可以应用于车联网,在车联网的信号同步系统中,包括:多个车载设备(UE#1,UE#2,UE#3),车载设备之间可以相互通信;一个或多个路侧 单元(RSU),可以与各个车载设备和/或eNB进行通信;一个或多个LTE基站设备(eNB),可以与各个车载设备和/或RSU进行通信;一个或多个NR基站设备(gNB),它可以与各个车载设备和/或RSU进行通信;一个或多个全球导航卫星系统(GNSS:global navigation satellite system),可以为多个车载设备提供定位与授时的信息。其中,RSU单元在功能上既可以是一个车载设备的功能,也可以是一个eNB或gNB设备的功能,还可以是车载设备+eNB设备的功能。As shown in Figure 1, the communication method of the present application can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles. In the signal synchronization system of the Internet of Vehicles, it includes: multiple vehicle-mounted devices (UE# 1, UE# 2, UE#3), between vehicle-mounted devices Can communicate with each other; one or more roadside units (RSU) can communicate with various vehicle-mounted equipment and/or eNB; one or more LTE base station equipment (eNB) can communicate with each vehicle-mounted equipment and/or RSU; One or more NR base station equipment (gNB), which can communicate with various vehicle-mounted equipment and/or RSU; one or more global navigation satellite systems (GNSS: global navigation satellite system), which can provide positioning and positioning for multiple vehicle-mounted equipment Timing information. Among them, the function of the RSU unit can be either a function of a vehicle-mounted device, a function of an eNB or gNB device, or a function of a vehicle-mounted device + an eNB device.
车载设备随着车辆高速移动,UE#1和UE#2之间相对运功时,具有最大的相对移动速度。上述各个设备之间都可以相互通信,通信时可以使用蜂窝链路的频谱,也可以使用智能交通频谱,例如5.9GHz附近的频谱。各设备相互通信的技术可以基于LTE协议进行增强,也可以基于D2D技术进行增强,还可以是NR中新定义的侧行链路系统。其中,eNB和/或gNB是可选的,如果有eNB和/或gNB,则是有网络覆盖的场景;如果无eNB或gNB则是属于无网络覆盖的场景。The vehicle-mounted equipment moves at a high speed with the vehicle, and the relative movement between UE# 1 and UE# 2 has the maximum relative moving speed. The above-mentioned various devices can communicate with each other, and the spectrum of the cellular link can be used for communication, and the spectrum of intelligent traffic can also be used, for example, the spectrum near 5.9 GHz. The technology for each device to communicate with each other can be enhanced based on the LTE protocol, can also be enhanced based on the D2D technology, or it can be a newly defined side link system in NR. Among them, eNB and/or gNB are optional. If there is eNB and/or gNB, it is a scenario with network coverage; if there is no eNB or gNB, it is a scenario without network coverage.
以下,为了易于理解本申请的通信方法,将第一终端装置、第二终端装置分别记作UE#1、UE#2。Hereinafter, in order to facilitate the understanding of the communication method of the present application, the first terminal device and the second terminal device are referred to as UE# 1 and UE# 2, respectively.
图2示出了多种类型的同步源的网络结构的示意图。Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network structure of multiple types of synchronization sources.
如图2所示,UE#2可以检测到来自UE#1、UE#3、UE#7发送的同步信号和/或参考信号,因此当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。As shown in Figure 2, UE# 2 can detect synchronization signals and/or reference signals sent from UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7. Therefore, when UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 meet the preset requirements Under conditions, UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
例如,UE#2可以接收来自UE#1(或者UE#3、UE#7)发送的数据#D1和/或调度分配(Scheduling Assignment,SA)信息;当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源或直接确定为同步源。可选地,SA通常用来指示数据#D1的发送参数,以便接收机能够用于对数据进行解调和译码。例如,这些发送参数包括传输数据的时、频资源的指示信息,调制编码方式的指示信息,重传的指示信息等。For example, UE# 2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling assignment (SA) information sent from UE#1 (or UE# 3, UE#7); when UE# 1, UE# 3, UE# 7 When the preset conditions are met, UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources of UE# 2 or directly determined as synchronization sources. Optionally, SA is usually used to indicate the transmission parameters of data #D1 so that the receiver can be used to demodulate and decode the data. For example, these sending parameters include indication information of time and frequency resources for transmitting data, indication information of modulation and coding mode, indication information of retransmission, etc.
例如,上述预设条件可以包括以下条件中的至少一项:数据#D1的循环冗余校验校验正确或成功;所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验校验正确或成功;参考信号RS#1的符号占用的资源带宽大于第一预设值;参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第二预设值。For example, the above-mentioned preset condition may include at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check of data #D1 is correct or successful; the cyclic redundancy check of the scheduled allocation SA information is correct or successful; reference The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbols of the signal RS# 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the second preset value.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1在向UE#2发送参考信号时,可以向UE#2指示UE#1的候选同步源的类型为GNSS,向UE#2指示UE#1的跳数为第1跳,这里,假设GNSS到UE#1的跳数为第0跳。In the embodiment of this application, when UE# 1 sends a reference signal to UE# 2, it can indicate to UE# 2 that the candidate synchronization source type of UE# 1 is GNSS, and that UE# 2's hop count is The first hop, here, assume that the number of hops from GNSS to UE# 1 is the 0th hop.
由于UE#2可以收到UE#1、UE#3发送的参考信号,当UE#1和UE#3的同步源相同时,UE#2可以根据UE#1、UE#3同步到同步源的跳数选择同步源;或者,UE#2可以根据UE#1、UE#3发送的参考信号的信号质量选择同步源。其中,UE#1和UE#3的同步源可以是GNSS或者eNB/gNB。Since UE# 2 can receive the reference signals sent by UE# 1 and UE# 3, when UE# 1 and UE# 3 have the same synchronization source, UE# 2 can synchronize to the synchronization source according to UE# 1 and UE# 3. The number of hops selects the synchronization source; or, UE# 2 can select the synchronization source according to the signal quality of the reference signals sent by UE# 1 and UE# 3. Among them, the synchronization source of UE# 1 and UE# 3 may be GNSS or eNB/gNB.
UE#2同时检测到UE#3发送的同步信号SLSS和UE#1发送的参考信号RS。其中UE#1的同步源为GNSS,UE#1在发送同步信号的时刻前,可以在向发送的参考信号RS中携带同步信息。UE#3可以是发送同步信号的UE,UE#3同步到GNSS或eNB,从而,UE#2可以同时收到UE#1和UE#3发送的同步信息。 UE# 2 simultaneously detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE# 3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE# 1. Wherein, the synchronization source of UE# 1 is GNSS, and UE# 1 may carry synchronization information in the reference signal RS sent to it before the time when the synchronization signal is sent. UE# 3 may be a UE that sends a synchronization signal, and UE# 3 is synchronized to the GNSS or eNB, so that UE# 2 can receive synchronization information sent by UE# 1 and UE# 3 at the same time.
在本申请实施例中,当UE#2同时检测到UE#3发送的同步信号SLSS和UE#1发送 的参考信号RS时,当UE#2从UE#1检测的RS满足预设条件时,UE#2可以将UE#1作为UE#2的同步源。In the embodiment of the present application, when UE# 2 detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE# 3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE# 1 at the same time, when the RS detected by UE# 2 from UE# 1 meets the preset condition, UE# 2 can use UE# 1 as the synchronization source of UE# 2.
以下,对本申请中的同步信息进行简要介绍。The following is a brief introduction to the synchronization information in this application.
在本申请实施例中,同步信息可以用于指示以下信息中的至少一项:UE#1的同步源的类型、UE#1与同步源GNSS或同步源gNB/eNB之间的跳数、UE#1是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、UE#1是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。In the embodiment of the present application, the synchronization information may be used to indicate at least one of the following information: the type of synchronization source of UE# 1, the number of hops between UE# 1 and the synchronization source GNSS or synchronization source gNB/eNB, UE Whether # 1 is directly synchronized to a satellite or network equipment, and whether UE# 1 is within the coverage of the network equipment.
例如,同步源的类型包括GNSS,eNB,gNB,UE中的任意一种。其中UE可以是:同步到GNSS的UE,同步到eNB的UE,同步到gNB的UE,或者不同步到其他设备的UE。For example, the type of synchronization source includes any one of GNSS, eNB, gNB, and UE. The UE may be: a UE that is synchronized to GNSS, a UE that is synchronized to an eNB, a UE that is synchronized to a gNB, or a UE that is not synchronized to other devices.
例如,同步信息可以指示UE#1同步到GNSS,或者gNB/eNB。同步信息可以指示UE#1同步到GNSS或gNB/eNB之间的同步跳数。For example, the synchronization information may indicate that UE# 1 is synchronized to GNSS, or gNB/eNB. The synchronization information may indicate the number of synchronization hops between UE# 1 and GNSS or gNB/eNB.
应理解,UE#1同步到GNSS或gNB/eNB之间的同步跳数可以理解为UE#1同步到GNSS或gNB/eNB的定时中转次数。例如,UE1#的同步源为GNSS时,UE#1到GNSS之间的同步跳数为1。UE4同步到UE1,而UE1直接同步到GNSS,则UE4到GNSS的跳数为2。It should be understood that the number of synchronization hops between UE# 1 synchronized to GNSS or gNB/eNB can be understood as the number of timing transfers for UE# 1 to synchronize to GNSS or gNB/eNB. For example, when the synchronization source of UE1# is GNSS, the number of synchronization hops between UE# 1 and GNSS is 1. UE4 synchronizes to UE1, and UE1 directly synchronizes to GNSS, the number of hops from UE4 to GNSS is 2.
再如,当承载同步信息的较少时,可以采用较少的比特指示UE#1是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备。例如,使用1比特,取值为1时指示直接同步到卫星或网络设备。取值为0时表示非直接同步到到卫星或网络设备。For another example, when there is less synchronization information, fewer bits can be used to indicate whether UE# 1 is directly synchronized to a satellite or network device. For example, using 1 bit and a value of 1 indicates direct synchronization to a satellite or network device. A value of 0 means that it is not directly synchronized to a satellite or network device.
又如:或者采用较少的比特指示UE#1是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。例如,使用1比特指示UE#1是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。这里的处于网络设备的覆盖范围内是指UE可以接收到来自网络设备发送的系统消息,或者可以与网络设备建立连接状态。可选地,网络设备可以是发送同步信号的GNSS或gNB/eNB,还可以是发送同步信号的UE。Another example: Or use fewer bits to indicate whether UE# 1 is within the coverage of the network device. For example, 1 bit is used to indicate whether UE# 1 is within the coverage of the network device. Being within the coverage of the network device here means that the UE can receive system messages sent from the network device, or can establish a connection state with the network device. Optionally, the network device may be a GNSS or gNB/eNB that sends a synchronization signal, and it may also be a UE that sends a synchronization signal.
可选地,同步信息可以只包括第一终端装置的同步源的类型、第一终端装置与GNSS或网络设备同步源之间的同步跳数、第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内多种信息中的任意一种,也可以是任意两种,任意三种或者所有的四种。Optionally, the synchronization information may only include the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the GNSS or network equipment synchronization source, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, Whether the first terminal device is in any one of the multiple types of information within the coverage of the network device may also be any two, any three, or all four.
例如,可选地,同步信息可以是同步源的类型和是否直接同步到GNSS或网络设备。例如,可以使用1比特来指示同步源是网络设备还是卫星;使用1比特指示是否直接同步到GNSS或网络设备。则同步信息一共为2比特。For example, optionally, the synchronization information may be the type of synchronization source and whether it is directly synchronized to GNSS or network equipment. For example, 1 bit can be used to indicate whether the synchronization source is a network device or a satellite; 1 bit can be used to indicate whether to directly synchronize to a GNSS or network device. The synchronization information is 2 bits in total.
例如,可选地,同步信息可以包括:第一终端装置的同步源的类型、第一终端装置与GNSS或网络设备同步源之间的同步跳数。此时可以使用1比特指示同步源的类型是GNSS或网络设备,使用2比特指示第一终端装置与GNSS或网络设备同步源之间的同步跳数。For example, optionally, the synchronization information may include: the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, and the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of the GNSS or network equipment. At this time, 1 bit can be used to indicate that the type of synchronization source is GNSS or network equipment, and 2 bits can be used to indicate the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of the GNSS or network equipment.
例如,可选地,若本申请的第一参考信号的发射机只能为同步到GNSS的UE,则同步信息为是否直接同步到GNSS。使用1比特即可指示同步信息。For example, optionally, if the transmitter of the first reference signal of the present application can only be a UE synchronized to GNSS, the synchronization information is whether to directly synchronize to GNSS. Use 1 bit to indicate synchronization information.
可选地,同步信息可以包括第一终端装置的同步源的类型、第一终端装置与GNSS或网络设备同步源之间的同步跳数、第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内所有三种信息。可以使用共4比特来指示。此时可以使用1比特指示同步源的类型是GNSS或网络设备,使用2比特指示第一终端装置与GNSS或网络设备同步源之间的同步跳数,使用1比特指示是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。Optionally, the synchronization information may include the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of the GNSS or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment. Kind of information. A total of 4 bits can be used to indicate. At this time, 1 bit can be used to indicate that the type of synchronization source is GNSS or network equipment, 2 bits are used to indicate the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source of GNSS or network equipment, and 1 bit is used to indicate whether it is in the coverage of the network equipment. Inside.
可选地,同步信息可以包括第一终端装置的同步源的类型、第一终端装置与GNSS或网络设备同步源之间的同步跳数、第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内所有四种信息。可以使用共5比特来指示。Optionally, the synchronization information may include the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of synchronization hops between the first terminal device and the GNSS or network equipment synchronization source, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, and the All four types of information are whether a terminal device is within the coverage of network equipment. A total of 5 bits can be used to indicate.
可选地,在本申请实施例中,直接同步到卫星或网络设备的UE的优先级高于间接同步到卫星或网络设备的UE。可选地,同步到GNSS的UE的优先级高于同步到gNB/eNB的UE,或者同步到GNSS的UE的优先级低于同步到gNB/eNB的UE。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the priority of a UE that is directly synchronized to a satellite or network device is higher than that of a UE that is indirectly synchronized to a satellite or network device. Optionally, the priority of the UE synchronized to the GNSS is higher than that of the UE synchronized to the gNB/eNB, or the priority of the UE synchronized to the GNSS is lower than the priority of the UE synchronized to the gNB/eNB.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1的同步源的类型可以是全球导航卫星系统GNSS、同步到所述GNSS的终端装置、NR网络设备、同步到所述NR基站设备的终端装置、LTE基站设备、同步到所述LTE基站设备的设备。In the embodiment of the present application, the type of synchronization source of UE# 1 may be Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, terminal devices synchronized to the GNSS, NR network equipment, terminal devices synchronized to the NR base station equipment, LTE base station equipment , A device synchronized to the LTE base station device.
例如,在图2中UE#1的同步源的类型可以是全球导航卫星系统GNSS、同步到GNSS的UE#3、gNB/eNB、同步到gNB/eNB的UE#5。For example, the type of synchronization source of UE# 1 in FIG. 2 may be Global Navigation Satellite System GNSS, UE# 3 synchronized to GNSS, gNB/eNB, and UE# 5 synchronized to gNB/eNB.
图3示出了本申请提供的一种通信方法的示意性交互图。Fig. 3 shows a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method provided by the present application.
在S301,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源。In S301, the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
具体的,UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列;和/或UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Specifically, UE# 1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1; and/or UE# 1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
方式A#1:UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列。Manner A#1: UE# 1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
在本申请实施例中,参考信号RS#1的序列可以是ZC序列、随机序列。其中,参考信号RS#1的序列参数包括以下至少一项:参考信号RS#1的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码OCC、序列长度。In the embodiment of the present application, the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 may be a ZC sequence or a random sequence. The sequence parameters of the reference signal RS# 1 include at least one of the following: the initial value of the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示或携带同步信息。可选地,UE#1可以仅是发送侧行链路同步信号SLSS(Sidelink Synchronization Signal)的装置,或者UE#1可以仅是不发送SLSS的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate or carry synchronization information. Optionally, UE# 1 may only be a device that transmits a side link synchronization signal SLSS (Sidelink Synchronization Signal), or UE# 1 may only be a device that does not transmit SLSS.
UE#1根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。 UE# 1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
例如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE# 1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE# 1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
方式A#2:UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Manner A#2: UE# 1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
可选地,这里的资源可以是频域资源、时域资源中的任意一种或多种。Optionally, the resources here may be any one or more of frequency domain resources and time domain resources.
例如,具体的,UE#1根据所述同步信息确定参考信号RS#1在物理资源块中的子载波。For example, specifically, UE# 1 determines the subcarrier of the reference signal RS# 1 in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
例如,确定在一个物理资源块PRB(Physical Resource Block)中的哪几个RE上。例如,若一个PRB中占用12个RE,当每个PRB中有2个RE时,RS#1在PRB中的位置可以是n,n+6,其中n=0,1,2,…,5。又如,若一个PRB中占用12个RE,当每个PRB中有3个RE时,RS#1在PRB中的位置可以是n,n+4,n+8,其中n=0,1,2,3。又如,若一个PRB中占用12个RE,当每个PRB中有4个RE时,RS#1在PRB中的位置可以是n,n+3, n+6,n+8,其中n=0,1,2。当n取不同的值时,RS#1在PRB中的位置可以用来指示同步信息的不同的状态或取值。For example, determine which REs in a physical resource block (PRB). For example, if a PRB occupies 12 REs, when there are 2 REs in each PRB, the position of RS# 1 in the PRB can be n, n+6, where n=0,1,2,...,5 . For another example, if a PRB occupies 12 REs, when there are 3 REs in each PRB, the position of RS# 1 in the PRB can be n, n+4, n+8, where n=0,1, 2, 3. For another example, if a PRB occupies 12 REs, when there are 4 REs in each PRB, the position of RS# 1 in the PRB can be n, n+3, n+6, n+8, where n= 0,1,2. When n takes different values, the position of RS# 1 in the PRB can be used to indicate different states or values of synchronization information.
可选地,当UE#1根据所述同步信息确定参考信号RS#1在物理资源块中的子载波时,RS#1上的发射功率比数据或控制信息占用的子载波功率高预设的值。这个预设的值可以是信令指示的、或预配置的或预定义的。例如,这个预设的值为1,2或3dB。Optionally, when UE# 1 determines the subcarrier of reference signal RS# 1 in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information, the transmit power on RS# 1 is higher than the power of the subcarrier occupied by data or control information by a preset value. value. This preset value may be indicated by signaling, or pre-configured or predefined. For example, this preset value is 1, 2 or 3dB.
例如,UE#1根据所述同步信息确定参考信号RS#1在时隙中的符号位置。For example, UE# 1 determines the symbol position of the reference signal RS# 1 in the time slot according to the synchronization information.
在S302,第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号。In S302, the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device.
具体的,UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1。Specifically, UE# 1 sends the reference signal RS# 1 to UE# 2.
进一步可选地,RS#1可以是同一个时隙中相同类型的多个参考信号RS,也可以是同一个时隙中不同类型的多个参考信号。Further optionally, RS# 1 may be multiple reference signals RS of the same type in the same time slot, or multiple reference signals of different types in the same time slot.
例如,对于不同类型的参考信号,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1发送数据时使用的DMRS、和/或UE#1发送调度数据时的控制信息的DMRS。For example, for different types of reference signals, the reference signal RS# 1 may be a DMRS used when UE# 1 transmits data, and/or a DMRS used for control information when UE# 1 transmits scheduling data.
再例如,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1发送调度数据时一起发送的参考信号RS,包括PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。For another example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be a reference signal RS that is sent together when UE# 1 sends scheduling data, including PT-RS, CSI-RS, or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
再例如,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1的无数据发射时单独发射的RS,包括:PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。也可以是承载在传输数据时隙中的PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。For another example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be the RS separately transmitted when the UE# 1 has no data transmission, including: PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH. It can also be PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH carried in the data transmission slot.
可选的,在UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1前,UE#1确定参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第一预设值,或者UE#1确定参考信号RS#1的带宽大于第二预设值。Optionally, before UE# 1 sends reference signal RS# 1 to UE# 2, UE# 1 determines that the sequence length of reference signal RS# 1 is greater than a first preset value, or UE# 1 determines that the reference signal RS# 1 The bandwidth is greater than the second preset value.
在S303,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号。In S303, the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device.
在S304,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。In S304, the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the second terminal device determines the first terminal according to the resource of the first reference signal The synchronization information of the device.
具体的,UE#2根据参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息;和/或UE#2根据参考信号RS#1的资源获取UE#1的同步信息。Specifically, UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1; and/or UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS# 1.
例如,UE#2检测承载同步信息的RS,UE#2根据检测UE#1发送的RS来获取UE#1的同步信息。For example, UE# 2 detects the RS carrying synchronization information, and UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 based on detecting the RS sent by UE# 1.
例如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则UE#2从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains This 1-bit synchronization information.
又如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则UE#2从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。For another example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 2 bits, UE# 2 detects from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4) that UE# 1 actually uses Sequence to obtain the 2-bit synchronization information actually transmitted.
在S305,第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。In S305, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2根据UE#1的同步信息确定UE#2的同步源。Specifically, UE# 2 determines the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
例如,当UE#2包括一个候选同步源(UE#1)时,UE#2可以根据UE#1的同步信息确定UE#2的同步源。For example, when UE# 2 includes a candidate synchronization source (UE#1), UE# 2 can determine the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
例如,当UE#2包括多个候选同步源时,UE#2可以根据UE#1的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定UE#2的同步源。For example, when UE# 2 includes multiple candidate synchronization sources, UE# 2 may determine the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1 and the priority information of the synchronization source.
以下,对本申请的优先级信息进行简要介绍。Below, the priority information of this application is briefly introduced.
表1示出了基于GNSS同步的优先级信息#P1。Table 1 shows priority information #P1 based on GNSS synchronization.
表1Table 1
P0P0 | GNSSGNSS |
P1P1 | 直接同步到GNSS的UEUE directly synchronized to GNSS |
P2P2 | 间接同步到GNSS的UEIndirectly synchronized to GNSS UE |
P3P3 | 其它的UEOther UE |
作为同步源时,上表1中P0到P3的优先级依次下降。When used as a synchronization source, the priorities of P0 to P3 in Table 1 above are sequentially decreased.
表2示出了基于gNB/eNB同步的优先级信息#P2。Table 2 shows priority information #P2 based on gNB/eNB synchronization.
表2Table 2
P0P0 | gNB/eNBgNB/eNB |
P1P1 | 直接同步到gNB/eNB的UEUE directly synchronized to gNB/eNB |
P2P2 | 间接同步到gNB/eNB的UEUE indirectly synchronized to gNB/eNB |
P3P3 | GNSSGNSS |
P4P4 | 直接同步到GNSS的UEUE directly synchronized to GNSS |
P5P5 | 间接同步到GNSS的UEIndirectly synchronized to GNSS UE |
P6P6 | 其它的UEOther UE |
作为同步源时,上表2中P0到P6的优先级依次下降。When used as a synchronization source, the priorities of P0 to P6 in Table 2 above decrease sequentially.
可选地,具体使用表1的规则还是表2的规则是基站信令配置的或预配置的。Optionally, whether the rule of Table 1 or the rule of Table 2 is specifically used is configured or pre-configured by base station signaling.
在上述基于GNSS同步的优先级信息中,直接同步到GNSS的UE具有相同的优先级,间接同步到GNSS的UE具有相同的优先级;或者在上述基于gNB/eNB同步的优先级信息中,直接同步到GNSS的UE具有相同的优先级,间接同步到GNSS的UE具有相同的优先级。In the foregoing priority information based on GNSS synchronization, UEs directly synchronized to GNSS have the same priority, and UEs that indirectly synchronized to GNSS have the same priority; or in the foregoing priority information based on gNB/eNB synchronization, directly UEs synchronized to GNSS have the same priority, and UEs synchronized to GNSS indirectly have the same priority.
进一步可选地,在优先级相同的条件下,如果接收机仍检测到多个候选的同步源,则选择信号质量(如参考信号接收功率RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power),和/或接收信号的强度指示RSSI(Received Signal Strength Indicator),和/或参考信号接收质量RSRQ(Reference Signal Receiving Quality))最佳的作为同步参考源。Further optionally, under the condition of the same priority, if the receiver still detects multiple candidate synchronization sources, it selects signal quality (such as Reference Signal Received Power) and/or the received signal The strength indicator RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator) and/or Reference Signal Receiving Quality (RSRQ) is the best as the synchronization reference source.
图4示出了本申请提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图,该方法可以由第一终端装置执行。FIG. 4 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application, and the method may be executed by the first terminal device.
在S401,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源。In S401, the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
具体的,UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列;和/或UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Specifically, UE# 1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1; and/or UE# 1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
例如,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1发送数据时使用的DMRS、UE#1发送调度数据时的控制信息的DMRS。For example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be a DMRS used when UE# 1 transmits data, and a DMRS used for control information when UE# 1 transmits scheduling data.
再例如,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1发送调度数据时一起发送的参考信号RS,包括PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。For another example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be a reference signal RS that is sent together when UE# 1 sends scheduling data, including PT-RS, CSI-RS, or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
再例如,参考信号RS#1可以是UE#1的无数据发射时单独发射的RS,包括:PT-RS, CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。For another example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be the RS separately transmitted when the UE# 1 has no data transmission, including: PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以根据同步信息中的至少一项确定参考信号RS#1的序列的参数,UE#1可以根据同步信息中的至少一项确定参考信号RS#1在物理资源块中的子载波。UE#1可以根据同步信息的取值确定参考信号RS#1在物理资源块中的子载波。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may determine the parameters of the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to at least one item in the synchronization information, and UE# 1 may determine that the reference signal RS# 1 is physically located according to at least one item in the synchronization information. The subcarriers in the resource block. UE# 1 may determine the subcarrier of reference signal RS# 1 in the physical resource block according to the value of the synchronization information.
在S402,第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号。In S402, the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device.
具体的,UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1。Specifically, UE# 1 sends the reference signal RS# 1 to UE# 2.
可选的,在UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1前,UE#1确定UE#1支持基于参考信号的同步。Optionally, before UE# 1 sends the reference signal RS# 1 to UE# 2, UE# 1 determines that UE# 1 supports synchronization based on the reference signal.
应理解,是否支持基于参考信号的同步可以是UE的一种能力。如果UE的能力不支持基于参考信号的同步,则UE#1不发送承载同步信息的RS。如果UE的能力支持基于参考信号的同步,则UE#1才能发送承载同步信息的RS。It should be understood that whether to support synchronization based on reference signals may be a capability of the UE. If the UE's capability does not support synchronization based on reference signals, UE# 1 does not transmit the RS carrying synchronization information. If the UE's capability supports synchronization based on reference signals, UE# 1 can send RSs carrying synchronization information.
可选地,UE向网络设备发送它是否支持基于参考信号的UE能力。Optionally, the UE sends to the network device whether it supports the UE capability based on the reference signal.
可选的,在UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1前,UE#1确定参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第一预设值,或者UE#1确定参考信号RS#1的带宽大于第二预设值。可选地,第一预设值,第二预设值可以是网络设备通过信令指示的,也可以是预配置的。可选地,网络设备指示的信令可以是系统消息,也可以是无线资源控制RRC消息。Optionally, before UE# 1 sends reference signal RS# 1 to UE# 2, UE# 1 determines that the sequence length of reference signal RS# 1 is greater than a first preset value, or UE# 1 determines that the reference signal RS# 1 The bandwidth is greater than the second preset value. Optionally, the first preset value and the second preset value may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be pre-configured. Optionally, the signaling indicated by the network device may be a system message or a radio resource control RRC message.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1向UE#2发送调度分配SA信息,所述调度分配SA信息用于指示UE#1的同步信息的部分或者全部信息;或者,所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验码用于指示UE#1的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。In this embodiment of the application, UE# 1 sends scheduling allocation SA information to UE# 2, and the scheduling allocation SA information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of UE# 1; or, the scheduling allocation SA information The cyclic redundancy check code is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of UE# 1.
可选地,循环冗余校验码可以是RNTI(Radio Network Tempory Identity:无线网络临时标识),也可以是CRC上使用的掩码。所谓的掩码是指在长为L的CRC校验位上,使用长为L的预定义的码字串与CRC模2加。当有2个长为L的码字串时,可以指示1比特的信息,当有4个长为L的码字串时,可以指示2比特的信息。可选地,L是一个整数,例如8,16,24,32等,本申请对此不做限定。Optionally, the cyclic redundancy check code may be RNTI (Radio Network Tempory Identity: Radio Network Temporary Identity) or a mask used on CRC. The so-called mask refers to the use of a predefined code string of length L and CRC modulo 2 addition on the CRC check bit of length L. When there are 2 codeword strings of length L, it can indicate 1-bit information, and when there are 4 codeword strings of length L, it can indicate 2-bit information. Optionally, L is an integer, such as 8, 16, 24, 32, etc., which is not limited in this application.
可选地,接收机通过尝试不同的CRC掩码可以检测到承载在CRC掩码来获取相应的同步信息。Optionally, the receiver can detect the CRC mask by trying different CRC masks to obtain the corresponding synchronization information.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1向UE#2发送数据#D1,所述数据#D1的循环冗余校验码用于指示UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 sends data #D1 to UE# 2, and the cyclic redundancy check code of the data #D1 is used to indicate synchronization information of UE# 1.
在本申请实施例中,参考信号RS#1、所述调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1位于同一个时隙;或者,参考信号RS#1、所述调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1位于时域连续的多个时隙中。In the embodiment of the present application, the reference signal RS# 1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data #D1 are located in the same time slot; or, the reference signal RS# 1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data# D1 is located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示同步信息,UE#1可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者UE#1可以是不发送同步信号的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate synchronization information, UE# 1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE# 1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
可选地,UE#1只能在非同步时隙上发送承载同步信息的参考信号。可选地,当UE#1为发送同步信号的装置时,UE#1分别在非同步时隙上发送承载同步信息的参考信号,以及在同步时隙上发送SLSS。Optionally, UE# 1 can only send a reference signal carrying synchronization information in an asynchronous time slot. Optionally, when UE# 1 is a device for sending a synchronization signal, UE# 1 sends a reference signal carrying synchronization information in an asynchronous time slot, and sends an SLSS in a synchronization time slot.
UE#1根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。 UE# 1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
例如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包 括RS1、RS2,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE# 1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE# 1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
图5示出了本申请提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
在S501,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号。In S501, the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2接收来自UE#1的参考信号RS#1。Specifically, UE# 2 receives the reference signal RS# 1 from UE# 1.
可选的,在UE#2接收来自UE#1的参考信号RS#1前,UE#2确定UE#2支持基于参考信号的同步。Optionally, before UE# 2 receives the reference signal RS# 1 from UE# 1, UE# 2 determines that UE# 2 supports synchronization based on the reference signal.
应理解,是否支持基于参考信号的同步可以是UE的一种能力。如果UE的能力不支持基于参考信号的同步,则UE#2不接收承载同步信息的RS。如果UE的能力支持基于参考信号的同步,则UE#2才能接收承载同步信息的RS。It should be understood that whether to support synchronization based on reference signals may be a capability of the UE. If the UE's capability does not support synchronization based on reference signals, UE# 2 does not receive the RS carrying synchronization information. If the UE's capability supports synchronization based on reference signals, UE# 2 can receive the RS carrying synchronization information.
可选地,UE向网络设备发送它是否支持基于参考信号的UE能力。Optionally, the UE sends to the network device whether it supports the UE capability based on the reference signal.
在S502,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。In S502, the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or, the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of a terminal device.
具体的,UE#2根据参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息;和/或UE#2根据参考信号RS#1的资源获取UE#1的同步信息。Specifically, UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1; and/or UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS# 1.
在本申请实施例中,UE#2可以检测同步信息对应的不同的RS,UE#2根据接收到的不同的RS来获取UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the received different RSs.
例如,UE#2根据UE#1发送的参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息。For example, UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 sent by UE# 1.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则UE#2从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则UE#2从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 2 bits, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
在S503,第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。In S503, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2根据UE#1的同步信息、优先级信息确定UE#2的同步源。Specifically, UE# 2 determines the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information and priority information of UE# 1.
例如,当UE#2的候选同步源包括一个同步源时,UE#2可以根据UE#1的同步信息确定UE#2的同步源。For example, when the candidate synchronization source of UE# 2 includes one synchronization source, UE# 2 may determine the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
例如,当UE#2的候选同步源包括多个同步源时,UE#2可以根据UE#1的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定UE#2的同步源。For example, when the candidate synchronization source of UE# 2 includes multiple synchronization sources, UE# 2 may determine the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1 and the priority information of the synchronization source.
在本申请实施例中,当UE#2同时检测到UE#3发送的同步信号SLSS和UE#1发送的参考信号RS时,UE#2可以按照优先级信息#P3选择同步源。In the embodiment of the present application, when UE# 2 detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE# 3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE# 1 at the same time, UE# 2 can select the synchronization source according to priority information #P3.
具体地,第二终端装置同时检测到第三终端装置发送的SLSS和第一终端装置发送的第一参考信号时,可以采用以下任意一种方式来确定SLSS和第一参考信号之间的优先级关系:Specifically, when the second terminal device simultaneously detects the SLSS sent by the third terminal device and the first reference signal sent by the first terminal device, any of the following methods can be used to determine the priority between the SLSS and the first reference signal relationship:
在第三终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数和第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,第一终端装置和第三终端装置的优先级相同;When the number of hops synchronized by the third terminal device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, the priorities of the first terminal device and the third terminal device are the same;
在第三终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数和第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,第一终端装置相对于第三终端装置具有更高的优先级;When the number of hops synchronized by the third terminal device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, the first terminal device has a higher priority than the third terminal device;
在第三终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数和第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,第一终端装置相对于第三终端装置具有更低的优先级;When the number of hops synchronized by the third terminal device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, the first terminal device has a lower priority than the third terminal device;
在第三终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数和第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,第一终端装置根据预配置信息确定第一终端装置和第三终端装置的优先级。When the number of hops synchronized by the third terminal device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, the first terminal device determines the priorities of the first terminal device and the third terminal device according to the pre-configuration information .
可选地,其中预配置信息可以是网络设备指示的,也可以是预配置的。预配置信息用来指示具有相同跳数的第一终端装置和第三终端装置的优先级哪个更高。Optionally, the pre-configuration information may be indicated by the network device or pre-configured. The pre-configuration information is used to indicate which priority is higher for the first terminal device and the third terminal device with the same number of hops.
在本申请实施例中,表3示出了基于参考信号同步的优先级信息#P3。In the embodiment of the present application, Table 3 shows priority information #P3 based on reference signal synchronization.
表3ATable 3A
作为同步源时,上表3A中P1到P5的优先级依次下降。When used as a synchronization source, the priorities of P1 to P5 in Table 3A above decrease in order.
可选地,UE#3同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述UE#1同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,UE#1相对于UE#3具有更低的优先级。如在表3B中的示例。Optionally, when the number of hops for UE# 3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE# 1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE# 1 has a lower priority than UE# 3. As in the example in Table 3B.
表3BTable 3B
作为同步源时,上表3B中P1到P5的优先级依次下降。When used as a synchronization source, the priorities of P1 to P5 in Table 3B above are sequentially decreased.
在表3B中,UE#3同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述UE#1同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,UE#1相对于UE#3具有更高的优先级。In Table 3B, when the number of hops for UE# 3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE# 1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE# 1 has a higher priority than UE# 3.
表3CTable 3C
在表3C中,UE#3同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述UE#1同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,UE#1和所述UE#3的优先级相同。In Table 3C, when the number of hops for UE# 3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE# 1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE# 1 and UE# 3 have the same priority.
图6示出了本申请提供的另一种通信方法的示意性交互图。Fig. 6 shows a schematic interaction diagram of another communication method provided by the present application.
在S601,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源。In S601, the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
参考步骤S301,UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列;和/或UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Referring to step S301, UE# 1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1; and/or UE# 1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
在S602,第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号、第一数据和/或第一控制信息。In S602, the first terminal device sends the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information to the second terminal device.
具体的,UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1、数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息。Specifically, UE# 1 sends reference signal RS# 1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information to UE# 2.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用数据#D1的多个DMRS符号上的传输序列来指示同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use transmission sequences on multiple DMRS symbols of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
可选地,可以使用多个DMRS符号上的序列对应的长序列来指示同步信息。例如,数据#D1存在M列DMRS,其中DMRS长度为L,则承载同步信息的参考信号RS#1的序列长度为kL,其中k≤M。Optionally, long sequences corresponding to sequences on multiple DMRS symbols may be used to indicate synchronization information. For example, data #D1 has M columns of DMRS, where the DMRS length is L, and the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 carrying synchronization information is kL, where k≤M.
可选地,相当于使用长为kL的序列来指示同步信息,这个长为kL的序列截断为k个分别长为L的序列来生成k个DMRS符号。例如:M=4,k=2,L=12,则使用长为24的序列来指示同步信息,这个长为24的序列截断为2个分别长为12的序列来生成2个DMRS符号。Optionally, it is equivalent to using a sequence of length kL to indicate synchronization information, and the sequence of length kL is truncated into k sequences of length L to generate k DMRS symbols. For example: M=4, k=2, L=12, a sequence of length 24 is used to indicate synchronization information, and the sequence of length 24 is truncated into two sequences of length 12 to generate 2 DMRS symbols.
可选地,可以使用时隙上承载多个DMRS符号的时域相邻的k个DMRS符号上的序列来指示同步信息。例如:当数据#D1上承载存在3个(或4个)DMRS时,可以使用在时域上最接近的2个DMRS来指示同步信息。Optionally, a sequence on k adjacent DMRS symbols in the time domain carrying multiple DMRS symbols on the time slot may be used to indicate synchronization information. For example: when there are 3 (or 4) DMRSs carried on the data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
可选地,可以将时隙中的多个DMRS分成不同的子组,分别指示同步信息的相同部分或不同部分。可选地,这里的部分可以是同步信息中的相同的某种或某几种具体的同步信息,还可以是同一种同步信息中的相同的比特位。例如,数据#D1存在多个DMRS符号S1,S2,S3,S4时,可以使用{S1,S2}、{S3,S4}分别指示相同或不同的同步信息。Optionally, multiple DMRSs in the time slot can be divided into different subgroups, respectively indicating the same part or different parts of the synchronization information. Optionally, the part here may be the same certain type or types of specific synchronization information in the synchronization information, and may also be the same bits in the same type of synchronization information. For example, when there are multiple DMRS symbols S1, S2, S3, S4 in data #D1, {S1, S2} and {S3, S4} can be used to indicate the same or different synchronization information respectively.
在S603,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号、第一数据和/或第一控制信息。In S603, the second terminal device receives the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information from the first terminal device.
在本申请实施例中,参考信号RS#1、所述调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1位于同一个时隙;或者,参考信号RS#1、所述调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1位于时域连续的多个时隙中。In the embodiment of the present application, the reference signal RS# 1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data #D1 are located in the same time slot; or, the reference signal RS# 1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data# D1 is located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
在S604,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。In S604, the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal The synchronization information of the device.
参考步骤S304,UE#2根据参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息;和/或UE#2根据参考信号RS#1的资源获取UE#1的同步信息。Referring to step S304, UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1; and/or UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS# 1.
在S605,第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。In S605, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2根据UE#1的同步信息确定UE#2的同步源。Specifically, UE# 2 determines the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
图7示出了本申请提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 7 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
在S701,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源。In S701, the first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines to send the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. Signal resources.
具体的,UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列;和/或UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Specifically, UE# 1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1; and/or UE# 1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
在S702,第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号、第一数据和/或第一控制信息。In S702, the first terminal device sends the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information to the second terminal device.
具体的,UE#1向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1、数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息。Specifically, UE# 1 sends reference signal RS# 1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information to UE# 2.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用数据#D1的多个DMRS符号上的传输序列来指示同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use transmission sequences on multiple DMRS symbols of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
可选地,可以使用多个DMRS符号上的序列对应的长序列来指示同步信息。例如,数据#D1存在M列DMRS,其中DMRS长度为L,则承载同步信息的参考信号RS#1的序列长度为kL,其中k≤M。Optionally, long sequences corresponding to sequences on multiple DMRS symbols may be used to indicate synchronization information. For example, data #D1 has M columns of DMRS, where the DMRS length is L, and the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 carrying synchronization information is kL, where k≤M.
可选地,相当于使用长为kL的序列来指示同步信息,这个长为kL的序列截断为k个分别长为L的序列来生成k个DMRS符号。例如:M=4,k=2,L=12,则使用长为24的序列来指示同步信息,这个长为24的序列截断为2个分别长为12的序列来生成2个DMRS符号。Optionally, it is equivalent to using a sequence of length kL to indicate synchronization information, and the sequence of length kL is truncated into k sequences of length L to generate k DMRS symbols. For example: M=4, k=2, L=12, a sequence of length 24 is used to indicate synchronization information, and the sequence of length 24 is truncated into two sequences of length 12 to generate 2 DMRS symbols.
可选地,可以使用时隙上承载多个DMRS符号的时域相邻的k个DMRS符号上的序列来指示同步信息。例如:当数据#D1上承载存在3个(或4个)DMRS时,可以使用在时域上最接近的2个DMRS来指示同步信息。Optionally, a sequence on k adjacent DMRS symbols in the time domain carrying multiple DMRS symbols on the time slot may be used to indicate synchronization information. For example: when there are 3 (or 4) DMRSs carried on the data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
可选地,可以将时隙中的多个DMRS分成不同的子组,分别指示同步信息的相同部分或不同部分。可选地,这里的部分可以是同步信息中的相同的某种或某几种具体的同步信息,还可以是同一种同步信息中的相同的比特位。例如,数据#D1存在多个DMRS符号S1,S2,S3,S4时,可以使用{S1,S2}、{S3,S4}分别指示相同或不同的同步信息。Optionally, multiple DMRSs in the time slot can be divided into different subgroups, respectively indicating the same part or different parts of the synchronization information. Optionally, the part here may be the same certain type or types of specific synchronization information in the synchronization information, and may also be the same bits in the same type of synchronization information. For example, when there are multiple DMRS symbols S1, S2, S3, S4 in data #D1, {S1, S2} and {S3, S4} can be used to indicate the same or different synchronization information respectively.
图8示出了本申请提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
在本申请实施例中,终端装置可以使用相同的类型的参考信号或不同类型的参考信号来指示同步信息。例如,可以同时使用数据上的DMRS和控制信息SA上的DMRS的生成序列来指示同步信息。可选地,指示的同步信息可以相同或不同。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may use the same type of reference signal or different types of reference signals to indicate synchronization information. For example, the generation sequence of the DMRS on the data and the DMRS on the control information SA can be used at the same time to indicate the synchronization information. Optionally, the indicated synchronization information may be the same or different.
在S801,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号、第一数据和/或第一控制信息。In S801, the second terminal device receives the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information from the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2接收来自UE#1的参考信号RS#1、数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息、和/或CSI-RS、和或PT-RS。Specifically, UE# 2 receives reference signal RS# 1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information, and/or CSI-RS, and or PT-RS from UE# 1.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者UE#1可以是不发送同步信号的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE# 1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals.
在本申请实施例中,参考信号RS#1、所述调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1位于同一个时隙;或者,参考信号RS#1、所述调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1位于时域连续的多个时隙中。In the embodiment of the present application, the reference signal RS# 1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data #D1 are located in the same time slot; or, the reference signal RS# 1, the scheduling allocation SA information and/or data# D1 is located in multiple consecutive time slots in the time domain.
在S802,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的 同步信息。In S802, the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or, the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of a terminal device.
具体的,UE#2根据数据#D1的DMRS和所述调度分配SA信息的DMRS获取UE#1的同步信息、和/或CSI-RS、和或PT-RS。Specifically, UE# 2 obtains synchronization information, and/or CSI-RS, and or PT-RS of UE# 1 according to the DMRS of data #D1 and the DMRS of the scheduling allocation SA information.
可选地,UE#2根据数据#D1的循环冗余校验码、和/或所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验码获取UE#1的同步信息。Optionally, UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information.
在本申请实施例中,UE#2接收来自UE#1的数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息;UE#2根据数据#D1的DMRS和所述调度分配SA信息的DMRS获取UE#1的同步信息;或者UE#2根据数据#D1的循环冗余校验码、和/或所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验码获取UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of this application, UE# 2 receives data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information from UE# 1; UE# 2 obtains UE# 1's data according to the DMRS of data #D1 and the DMRS of the scheduling allocation SA information. Synchronization information; or UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the SA information of the scheduling allocation.
可选地,上述获取的同步信息可以是同一个同部分信息中相同的部分,也可以是同一个同步信息中的不同的部分。Optionally, the synchronization information obtained above may be the same part of the same part of the same information, or may be a different part of the same synchronization information.
S803,第二终端设备根据第一终端设备的同步信息确定第二终端设备的同步源。S803: The second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
如图2所示,UE#2可以检测到来自UE#1、UE#3、UE#7发送的参考信号,因此当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。As shown in Figure 2, UE# 2 can detect the reference signals sent from UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7. Therefore, when UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 meet the preset conditions, UE# 1. UE# 3 and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
例如,UE#2可以接收来自UE#1(或者UE#3、UE#7)发送的数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息;当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。For example, UE# 2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent from UE#1 (or UE# 3, UE#7); when UE# 1, UE# 3, UE# 7 meet preset conditions At this time, UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
其中,上述预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:数据#D1的循环冗余校验码校验正确;所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;参考信号RS#1的符号占用的资源带宽大于第一预设值;参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第二预设值。Wherein, the above-mentioned preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 is checked correctly; the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information is checked correctly; reference signal RS# The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbol of 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the second preset value.
在本申请实施例中,当UE#2检测到的终端装置作为同步源时,需要满足以下条件中的至少一种:数据的循环冗余校验码校验正确;所述控制信息SA的循环冗余校验校验正确;参考信号的符号占用的带宽大于第一预设值;第一参考信号序列长度大于第二预设值。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device detected by UE# 2 serves as the synchronization source, at least one of the following conditions needs to be met: the cyclic redundancy check code of the data is verified correctly; the cycle of the control information SA The redundancy check is correct; the bandwidth occupied by the symbols of the reference signal is greater than the first preset value; the length of the first reference signal sequence is greater than the second preset value.
当UE#2检测到的终端装置满足上述条件时,UE#2根据上述条件确定UE#2的候选同步源,或者UE#2根据上述条件确定检测到的RS是否有效。例如,在UE#2的SA检测正确的情况下,数据#D1上承载对应的RS#1存在可用性,即UE#2检测到的数据#D1满足可靠性要求。When the terminal device detected by UE# 2 satisfies the aforementioned conditions, UE# 2 determines the candidate synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the aforementioned conditions, or UE# 2 determines whether the detected RS is valid according to the aforementioned conditions. For example, when the SA detection of UE# 2 is correct, the data #D1 bears the corresponding RS# 1 availability, that is, the data #D1 detected by UE# 2 meets the reliability requirement.
图9示出了本申请提供的另一种通信方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
在S901,第二终端装置检测来自第一终端装置发送的第一参考信号的信号质量。In S901, the second terminal device detects the signal quality of the first reference signal sent from the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2检测参考信号RS#1的信号质量。Specifically, UE# 2 detects the signal quality of the reference signal RS# 1.
在S902,当第一参考信号的信号质量大于第一阈值时,第二终端装置确定第一终端装置为候选同步源。In S902, when the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than the first threshold, the second terminal device determines that the first terminal device is a candidate synchronization source.
具体的,当参考信号RS#1的信号质量大于第一阈值时,UE#2将UE#1作为候选同步源。Specifically, when the signal quality of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the first threshold, UE# 2 uses UE# 1 as the candidate synchronization source.
例如,UE#2检测到的RS上的信号质量大于第1信号质量门限,则UE#2将UE#1作为候选同步源。For example, if the signal quality on the RS detected by UE# 2 is greater than the first signal quality threshold, UE# 2 uses UE# 1 as the candidate synchronization source.
可选的,这个预设的门限可以是信令指示的,也可以是预配置的,或预定义的。Optionally, this preset threshold may be indicated by signaling, or may be pre-configured or predefined.
例如,UE#2检测到的RS上的信号质量大于第2信号质量门限,则可以直接作为候选同步源。For example, if the signal quality on the RS detected by UE# 2 is greater than the second signal quality threshold, it can be directly used as a candidate synchronization source.
在本申请实施例中,存在多个大于第一预设门限的RS被检测到,则UE#2选择满足上述3个条件的信号质量最好的作为候选同步源。In this embodiment of the application, if multiple RSs greater than the first preset threshold are detected, UE# 2 selects the one with the best signal quality that meets the above three conditions as the candidate synchronization source.
可选地,信号质量包括以下中的至少一种:如参考信号接收功率RSRP(Reference Signal Received Power),接收信号的强度指示RSSI(Received Signal Strength Indicator),参考信号接收质量RSRQ(Reference Signal Receiving Quality)。Optionally, the signal quality includes at least one of the following: for example, Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP), Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), and Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ). ).
在S903,第二终端装置根据所述同步信息、候选同步源的优先级信息确定第二终端装置的同步源。In S903, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information and the priority information of the candidate synchronization source.
具体的,UE#2根据UE#1的同步信息、候选同步源的优先级信息确定UE#2的同步源。Specifically, UE# 2 determines the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1 and the priority information of candidate synchronization sources.
在本申请实施例中,UE#2检测参考信号RS#1的信号质量;当参考信号RS#1的信号质量大于第一阈值时,UE#2将UE#1作为候选同步源;UE#2根据所述候选同步源确定UE#2的同步源。In the embodiment of this application, UE# 2 detects the signal quality of the reference signal RS# 1; when the signal quality of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the first threshold, UE# 2 uses UE# 1 as the candidate synchronization source; UE# 2 Determine the synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the candidate synchronization source.
在本申请实施例中,UE的UE#2无同步信号的接收能力,UE只在检测到的RS中确定同步源。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 2 of the UE has no synchronization signal reception capability, and the UE only determines the synchronization source in the detected RS.
图10示出了本申请提供的又一种通信方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another communication method provided by the present application.
在S1001,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号、第一数据和/或第一控制信息。In S1001, the second terminal device receives the first reference signal, the first data and/or the first control information from the first terminal device.
具体的,UE#2接收来自UE#1的参考信号RS#1、数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息。Specifically, UE# 2 receives reference signal RS# 1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information from UE# 1.
例如,UE#2检测UE#1发送的参考信号RS#1、数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息,其中调度分配SA信息为UE#1发送数据#D1时、用于指示数据#D1的控制信息。For example, UE# 2 detects the reference signal RS# 1, data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent by UE# 1, where the scheduling allocation SA information is that when UE# 1 sends data #D1, it is used to indicate data #D1. Control information.
在S1002,当第一终端装置的第一参考信号、第一数据和/或第一控制信息满足预设条件时,第二终端装置确定第一终端装置为候选同步源。In S1002, when the first reference signal, the first data, and/or the first control information of the first terminal device meet a preset condition, the second terminal device determines that the first terminal device is a candidate synchronization source.
如图2所示,UE#2可以检测到来自UE#1、UE#3、UE#7发送的参考信号,因此当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。As shown in Figure 2, UE# 2 can detect the reference signals sent from UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7. Therefore, when UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 meet the preset conditions, UE# 1. UE# 3 and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
例如,UE#2可以接收来自UE#1(或者UE#3、UE#7)发送的数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息;当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。For example, UE# 2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent from UE#1 (or UE# 3, UE#7); when UE# 1, UE# 3, UE# 7 meet preset conditions At this time, UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
其中,上述预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:数据#D1的循环冗余校验码校验正确;所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;参考信号RS#1的符号占用的资源带宽大于第一预设值;参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第二预设值。Wherein, the above-mentioned preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 is checked correctly; the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information is checked correctly; reference signal RS# The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbol of 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the second preset value.
在本申请实施例中,当UE#2检测到的终端装置作为同步源时,需要满足以下条件中的至少一种:数据的循环冗余校验码校验正确;所述控制信息SA的循环冗余校验校验正确;参考信号的符号占用的带宽大于第一预设值;第一参考信号序列长度大于第二预设值。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device detected by UE# 2 serves as the synchronization source, at least one of the following conditions needs to be met: the cyclic redundancy check code of the data is verified correctly; the cycle of the control information SA The redundancy check is correct; the bandwidth occupied by the symbols of the reference signal is greater than the first preset value; the length of the first reference signal sequence is greater than the second preset value.
当UE#2检测到的终端装置满足上述条件时,UE#2根据上述条件确定UE#2的候选同步源,或者UE#2根据上述条件确定检测到的RS是否有效。例如,在UE#2的SA检测正确的情况下,数据#D1上承载对应的RS#1存在可用性,即UE#2检测到的数据#D1满足可靠性要求。When the terminal device detected by UE# 2 satisfies the aforementioned conditions, UE# 2 determines the candidate synchronization source of UE# 2 according to the aforementioned conditions, or UE# 2 determines whether the detected RS is valid according to the aforementioned conditions. For example, when the SA detection of UE# 2 is correct, the data #D1 bears the corresponding RS# 1 availability, that is, the data #D1 detected by UE# 2 meets the reliability requirement.
在S1003,第二终端装置根据所述同步信息、候选同步源的优先级信息确定第二终端装置的同步源。In S1003, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information and the priority information of the candidate synchronization source.
图11示出了本申请的参考信号的序列的示意性结构图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
参见图11,数据#D1上承载有2个长为L1的DMRS(RS1、RS2),SA上有n个长为L2的DMRS,则指示同步信息的DMRS的长度为:(2*L1+n*L2)。Referring to Figure 11, data #D1 carries 2 DMRSs (RS1, RS2) of length L1, and there are n DMRSs of length L2 on SA, then the length of the DMRS indicating synchronization information is: (2*L1+n *L2).
或者,使用2L1来指示同步信息#1;使用nL2来指示同步信息#2。Or, use 2L1 to indicate synchronization information # 1; use nL2 to indicate synchronization information # 2.
图12示出了本申请的参考信号的序列的示意性结构图。FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of the reference signal sequence of the present application.
数据#D1上承载有4个DMRS符号:RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,可以将这些DMRS分成2部分{RS1,RS2}、{RS3,RS4},其中{RS1,RS2}、{RS3,RS4}指示的同步信息可以相同或不同。Data #D1 carries 4 DMRS symbols: RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4, these DMRS can be divided into 2 parts {RS1, RS2}, {RS3, RS4}, of which {RS1, RS2}, {RS3, RS4} The indicated synchronization information can be the same or different.
例如,{RS1,RS2}可以指示同步信息#1、{RS3,RS4}可以指示同步信息#2。For example, {RS1, RS2} may indicate synchronization information # 1, {RS3, RS4} may indicate synchronization information # 2.
图13示出了本申请的参考信号的序列的示意性结构图。FIG. 13 shows a schematic structural diagram of the sequence of the reference signal of the present application.
当数据#D1上承载存在多个DMRS时,可以使用在时域上最接近的2个DMRS来指示同步信息。例如,数据#D1上承载有3个DMRS符号:RS1、RS2、RS3,可以将同步信息映射在两个相邻的符号{RS1,RS2}上。When multiple DMRSs are carried on data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information. For example, data #D1 bears 3 DMRS symbols: RS1, RS2, RS3, and synchronization information can be mapped on two adjacent symbols {RS1, RS2}.
图14示出了本申请的参考信号在PRS上的资源映射方式。Fig. 14 shows the resource mapping manner of the reference signal of the present application on the PRS.
参见图14,在本申请实施例中,可以使用RS所在每个RB内的频域位置集合来指示同步信息,其中RS在频域的不同映射方式指示不同的同步信息。其中映射方式#1表示0,映射方式#2表示1,以指示2比特的同步信息。映射方式#1、映射方式#2分别包含两列RS。Referring to FIG. 14, in the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain position set in each RB where the RS is located may be used to indicate synchronization information, where different mapping modes of the RS in the frequency domain indicate different synchronization information. The mapping mode # 1 represents 0, and the mapping mode # 2 represents 1, to indicate 2-bit synchronization information. Mapping mode # 1 and mapping mode # 2 respectively include two columns of RS.
如果RS在频域上的间隔为4,则一共可以有4种映射方式,分别表示为0,1,2,3。这4个值可以指示2比特的同步信息。If the interval of the RS in the frequency domain is 4, there can be a total of 4 mapping methods, which are represented as 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively. These 4 values can indicate 2-bit synchronization information.
可选地,当有4列RS时,可以分成2组,每组按上面的方式分别指示1或2比特的同步信息。指示的同步信息可以相同,也可以不同。Optionally, when there are 4 columns of RSs, they can be divided into 2 groups, and each group respectively indicates 1 or 2 bits of synchronization information in the above manner. The indicated synchronization information can be the same or different.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源,UE#1可以通过以下方式指示UE#1的同步信息:In the embodiment of this application, UE# 1 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1, and UE# 1 can indicate the synchronization information of UE# 1 in the following manner:
方式#A1Way #A1
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用数据#D1的多个DMRS符号上的序列来指示同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use the sequence on multiple DMRS symbols of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
例如,数据#D1存在M列DMRS,其中DMRS长度为L,则承载同步信息的参考信号RS#1的序列长度为kL,其中k≤M。当数据#D1上承载存在3个(或4个)DMRS时,可以使用在时域上最接近的2个DMRS来指示同步信息。For example, data #D1 has M columns of DMRS, where the DMRS length is L, and the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 carrying synchronization information is kL, where k≤M. When there are 3 (or 4) DMRSs carried on the data #D1, the two closest DMRSs in the time domain can be used to indicate synchronization information.
例如,数据#D1存在多个DMRS符号RS1,RS2,RS3,RS4时,可以使用{RS1,RS2}、{RS3,RS4}分别指示不同的同步信息。For example, when there are multiple DMRS symbols RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4 in data #D1, {RS1, RS2} and {RS3, RS4} can be used to indicate different synchronization information respectively.
方式#A2Way #A2
使用数据#D1的DMRS和调度数据#D1的调度分配SA信息上的DMRS联合来指示。The DMRS of the data #D1 and the DMRS of the scheduling allocation SA information of the scheduling data #D1 are used to indicate jointly.
例如,数据#D1上承载有k个长为L1的DMRS,SA上有n个长为L2的DMRS,则指示同步信息的DMRS的长度为:(k*L1+n*L2)。For example, if data #D1 carries k DMRSs of length L1, and SA has n DMRSs of length L2, the length of the DMRS indicating synchronization information is: (k*L1+n*L2).
或者,使用kL1来指示同步信息#1;使用nL2来指示同步信息#2。Or, use kL1 to indicate synchronization information # 1; use nL2 to indicate synchronization information # 2.
方式#A3Way #A3
当数据#D1上承载有DMRS、PTRS或者CSI-RS时,DMRS、PTRS或者CSI-RS共同指示同步信息。When the data #D1 carries DMRS, PTRS or CSI-RS, the DMRS, PTRS or CSI-RS together indicate synchronization information.
例如,数据#D1上承载有k个长为L1的DMRS,RS上有n个长为L3的DMRS,则指示同步信息的DMRS的长度为:(k*L1+n*L3)。For example, if data #D1 carries k DMRSs of length L1, and there are n DMRSs of length L3 on the RS, the length of the DMRS indicating synchronization information is: (k*L1+n*L3).
或者,可选的,使用kL1来指示同步信息#1;使用nL3来指示同步信息#2。Or, optionally, use kL1 to indicate synchronization information # 1; use nL3 to indicate synchronization information # 2.
方式#A4Way #A4
当数据#D1上承载有多个DMRS符号时,可以将这些DMRS分成2部分,第1部分的RS与第2部分的RS相同或不同,来指示1比特的同步信息。When multiple DMRS symbols are carried on the data #D1, these DMRS can be divided into two parts, and the RS in the first part is the same or different from the RS in the second part to indicate 1-bit synchronization information.
例如,数据#D1上承载有2个DMRS,则RS1与RS2相同或不同,指示1比特的同步信息。For example, data #D1 carries 2 DMRS, RS1 and RS2 are the same or different, indicating 1-bit synchronization information.
例如,数据#D1上承载有4个DMRS,则使用{RS1,RS2}与{RS3,RS4}相同或不同,来指示1比特的同步信息。For example, if data #D1 carries 4 DMRSs, {RS1, RS2} and {RS3, RS4} are the same or different to indicate 1-bit synchronization information.
例如,数据#D1上承载有4个DMRS,则使用RS1与RS2相同或不同,来指示1比特的同步信息#1;则使用RS3与RS4相同或不同,来指示相同的1比特的同步信息#1。For example, if data #D1 carries 4 DMRS, RS1 and RS2 are the same or different to indicate 1-bit synchronization information # 1; RS3 and RS4 are the same or different to indicate the same 1-bit synchronization information# 1.
方式#A5Way #A5
参见图13,在本申请实施例中,可以使用RS所在每个RB内的频域位置集合来指示同步信息,其中RS在频域的不同映射方式表示不同的信息。Referring to FIG. 13, in the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain position set in each RB where the RS is located may be used to indicate synchronization information, where different mapping modes of the RS in the frequency domain represent different information.
例如,映射方式#1表示0,映射方式#1表示1。其中,这2个值可以表示2比特的同步信息。For example, mapping mode # 1 represents 0, and mapping mode # 1 represents 1. Among them, these 2 values can represent 2-bit synchronization information.
如果RS在频域的间隔为4,则一共可以有4种映射方式,分别表示为0,1,2,3。这4个值可以指示2比特的同步信息。If the interval of the RS in the frequency domain is 4, there can be a total of 4 mapping methods, which are represented as 0, 1, 2, and 3 respectively. These 4 values can indicate 2-bit synchronization information.
可选地,当有4列RS时,可以分成2组,每组按上面的方式分别指示1或2比特的同步信息。指示的同步信息可以相同,也可以不同。Optionally, when there are 4 columns of RSs, they can be divided into 2 groups, and each group respectively indicates 1 or 2 bits of synchronization information in the above manner. The indicated synchronization information can be the same or different.
方式#A6Way #A6
使用调度分配SA信息和/或数据#D1的CRC码来指示同步信息。Use scheduling allocation SA information and/or CRC code of data #D1 to indicate synchronization information.
可选地,可以是对承载SA的PSCCH和承载数据#D1的PSSCH的循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check,CRC)进行加扰的方式实现。Optionally, it may be implemented in a manner of scrambling the cyclic redundancy check (cyclic redundancy check, CRC) of the PSCCH carrying the SA and the PSSCH carrying the data #D1.
不同的加扰使用的加扰序列串或比特串或加扰掩码对应一种同步信息的状态。当指示的同步信息有n比特时,则一共有2
n种CRC加扰的方式。
The scrambling sequence string or bit string or scrambling mask used for different scrambling corresponds to a state of synchronization information. When the indicated synchronization information has n bits, there are a total of 2 n CRC scrambling methods.
方式#A7Way #A7
直接使用调度分配SA信息中的显示信令来指示同步信息。Directly use the display signaling in the scheduling allocation SA information to indicate the synchronization information.
以上为本申请的通信方法的详细方案,以下对本申请的根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列的过程进行介绍。The above is a detailed solution of the communication method of the present application, and the process of determining the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of the UE# 1 of the present application will be introduced below.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1根据UE#1的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列,包括:In the embodiment of the present application, UE#1 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS#1 according to the synchronization information of UE#1, including:
(1)生成序列的初始值,例如:(1) Generate the initial value of the sequence, for example:
其中,r(m)为参考信号在某个RE上的序列,c()为随机序列。
Among them, r(m) is the sequence of the reference signal on a certain RE, and c() is the random sequence.
示例一:Cinit为生成随机序列,可以由同步信息生成。Example 1: Cinit is to generate a random sequence, which can be generated from synchronization information.
例如:E.g:
其中,
是在无线帧内对应子载波间隔下μ的时隙数,i
x为同步信息,a,b,c,d为整数,
为同步信号的标识。
among them, Is the number of time slots μ under the corresponding subcarrier interval in the radio frame, i x is synchronization information, a, b, c, d are integers It is the identification of the synchronization signal.
示例二:Cinit为生成随机序列,可以由同步信息与同步信号标识和/或小区标识生成。Example 2: Cinit is to generate a random sequence, which can be generated from synchronization information and synchronization signal identification and/or cell identification.
例如:E.g:
其中,
是在无线帧内对应子载波间隔下μ的时隙数,i
x为同步信息,a,b,c,d为整数,N
PCID为小区标识。
among them, Is the number of timeslots μ in the corresponding subcarrier interval in the radio frame, i x is synchronization information, a, b, c, d are integers, and N PCID is the cell identifier.
示例三:Cinit为生成随机序列,可以由同步信息与同步信息标识生成,和/或由某预设的同步标识生成,和/或控制信息中指示的源或目的标识生成,例如:Example 3: Cinit is to generate a random sequence, which can be generated by synchronization information and synchronization information identification, and/or generated by a preset synchronization identification, and/or generated by the source or destination identification indicated in the control information, for example:
其中,a,b,c,d为整数。其中
为SA中承载的标识,可以是以下中的任意一种:UE#1的标识,UE#2的标识,源标识,目的标识,源标识和目的标识的联合标识。进一步地,
可以是UE#1的标识,UE#2的标识,源标识,目的标识,源标识和目的标识的联合标识标识中的全部标识或部分字段对应的标识。
Among them, a, b, c, d are integers. among them The identifier carried in the SA can be any of the following: the identifier of UE#1, the identifier of UE#2, the source identifier, the destination identifier, and the combined identifier of the source identifier and the destination identifier. further, It can be the identifier of UE# 1, the identifier of UE# 2, the source identifier, the destination identifier, all the identifiers or the identifiers corresponding to some fields in the combined identifier of the source identifier and the destination identifier.
Cinit为随机序列的初始值,ix为待传输同步信息全部或部分信息,
表示同步信号的标识,mod表示取余操作。
Cinit is the initial value of the random sequence, ix is all or part of the synchronization information to be transmitted, Represents the identification of the synchronization signal, mod represents the remainder operation.
(2)生成序列时使用序列的循环移位和根序列号。(2) The cyclic shift and root sequence number of the sequence are used when generating the sequence.
可选地,序列的循环移位和根序列号,可以由同步信息与同步信息标识生成,和/或由某预设的同步标识生成,和/或控制信息中指示的源或目的标识生成。Optionally, the cyclic shift and root sequence number of the sequence may be generated from synchronization information and synchronization information identification, and/or generated from a certain preset synchronization identification, and/or source or destination identification indicated in the control information.
例如,本实施例可以用于ZC序列生成的RS。For example, this embodiment can be used for RS generated by ZC sequence.
u=f(x)mod M或者u=(a+f(x))mod M或者u=(a+b+f(x))mod Mu=f(x)mod M or u=(a+f(x))mod M or u=(a+b+f(x))mod M
其中,M表示支持的最大根序列数,如30或序列的长度L;u为ZC序列的根序列号。f(x)为同步信息x的函数。Among them, M represents the maximum number of root sequences supported, such as 30 or the length of the sequence L; u is the root sequence number of the ZC sequence. f(x) is a function of synchronization information x.
例如,f(x)=x,x的取值可以为0,1,2,3等。又如f(x)=a*x,a为非零整数。For example, f(x)=x, and the value of x can be 0, 1, 2, 3, etc. Another example is f(x)=a*x, a is a non-zero integer.
例如,生成序列循环移位α的参数:For example, to generate the parameters of the sequence cyclic shift α:
其中,N表示为待传输的序列的长度,h(x)是根据上述参数的一个函数,h(x)可以使用类似函数f(x)的方式来定义。Among them, N represents the length of the sequence to be transmitted, h(x) is a function based on the above parameters, and h(x) can be defined in a manner similar to the function f(x).
例如:h(x)=a*x,a为非零整数。又如:h(x)=a+bx,a,b为非零整数。For example: h(x)=a*x, a is a non-zero integer. Another example: h(x)=a+bx, a and b are non-zero integers.
(3)生成序列时使用的正交覆盖码OCC,OCC的长度为RS在时域上的符号上决定。(3) The orthogonal cover code OCC used when generating the sequence, the length of the OCC is determined by the symbol of the RS in the time domain.
可选地,序列时使用的正交覆盖码OCC,可以由同步信息与同步信息标识生成,和/或由某预设的同步标识生成,和/或控制信息中指示的源或目的标识生成。Optionally, the orthogonal cover code OCC used in the sequence may be generated from synchronization information and synchronization information identification, and/or generated from a certain preset synchronization identification, and/or source or destination identification indicated in the control information.
例如:E.g:
[+1 +1 +1 +1]if i
x=0
[+1 +1 +1 +1]if i x =0
[+1 -1 +1 -1]if i
x=1
[+1 -1 +1 -1]if i x =1
表示在时域上至少有4个RS符号。或者,Indicates that there are at least 4 RS symbols in the time domain. or,
[+1 +1 +1]if i
x=0
[+1 +1 +1]if i x =0
[+1 -1 +1]if i
x=1
[+1 -1 +1]if i x =1
表示在时域上至少有3个RS符号。或者Indicates that there are at least 3 RS symbols in the time domain. or
[+1 +1]if i
x=0
[+1 +1]if i x =0
[+1 -1]if i
x=1
[+1 -1]if i x =1
表示在时域上至少有2个RS符号。Indicates that there are at least 2 RS symbols in the time domain.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示同步信息,UE#1可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者UE#1可以是不发送同步信号的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate synchronization information, UE# 1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE# 1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
UE#1根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。 UE# 1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
例如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE# 1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE# 1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
在本申请实施例中,UE#2可以检测同步信息对应的不同的RS,UE#2根据接收到的不同的RS来获取UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the received different RSs.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则UE#2从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则UE#2从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 2 bits, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
基于上述通信方法,以下对本申请的终端装置、芯片系统进行详细描述。Based on the above communication method, the terminal device and chip system of the present application will be described in detail below.
根据前述方法,图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置10的示意图,如图15所示,该装置10可以为终端设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备的芯片或电路。该装置10可以包括处理单元11和存储单元12。该存储单元12用于存储指令,该处理单元11用于执行该存储单元12存储的指令,以使该装置10实现如上述方法中终端设备执 行的步骤。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 10 provided by an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. 15, the device 10 may be a terminal device, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be set in a terminal device. . The device 10 may include a processing unit 11 and a storage unit 12. The storage unit 12 is used to store instructions, and the processing unit 11 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 12, so that the device 10 implements the steps performed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned method.
进一步的,该装置10还可以包括输入口13和输出口14。进一步的,该处理单元11、存储单元12、输入口13和输出口14可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号。该存储单元12用于存储计算机程序,该处理单元11可以用于从该存储单元12中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制输入口13接收信号,控制输出口14发送信号,完成上述方法中终端设备的步骤。该存储单元12可以集成在处理单元11中,也可以与处理单元11分开设置。Further, the device 10 may also include an input port 13 and an output port 14. Further, the processing unit 11, the storage unit 12, the input port 13 and the output port 14 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals. The storage unit 12 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 11 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 12 to control the input port 13 to receive signals and the output port 14 to send signals to complete the above method Steps for terminal equipment. The storage unit 12 can be integrated in the processing unit 11 or can be provided separately from the processing unit 11.
若该装置10为终端设备,该输入口13为接收器,该输出口14为发送器。其中,接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。若该装置10为芯片或电路,该输入口13为输入接口,该输出口14为输出接口。If the device 10 is a terminal device, the input port 13 is a receiver, and the output port 14 is a transmitter. The receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively called a transceiver. If the device 10 is a chip or a circuit, the input port 13 is an input interface, and the output port 14 is an output interface.
在一种实现方式中,装置10可以作为发送参考信号的设备,或者发送参考信号、控制信息和/或数据的设备,以下对装置10作为发送设备执行的方法步骤进行详细介绍。In an implementation manner, the device 10 may be used as a device for sending reference signals, or a device for sending reference signals, control information, and/or data. The method steps performed by the device 10 as a sending device are described in detail below.
在S401,装置10的处理单元11根据装置10的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,处理单元11根据装置10的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源。In S401, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the device 10, and/or the processing unit 11 determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
具体的,装置10的处理单元11根据装置10的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列;和/或处理单元11根据装置10的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Specifically, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10; and/or the processing unit 11 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
方式A#1:装置10的处理单元11根据装置10的同步信息确定参考信号RS#1的序列。Manner A#1: The processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
在本申请实施例中,装置10的处理单元11可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示同步信息,装置10可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者装置10可以是不发送同步信号的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate synchronization information, the device 10 may be a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the device 10 may not send a synchronization signal. Device.
装置10的处理单元11根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。The processing unit 11 of the device 10 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
在本申请实施例中,装置10的处理单元11可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示或携带同步信息。可选地,装置10可以仅是发送链行链路同步信号SLSS(Sidelink Synchronization Signal)的装置,或者装置10可以仅是不发送SLSS的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate or carry synchronization information. Optionally, the device 10 may only be a device that transmits a sidelink synchronization signal SLSS (Sidelink Synchronization Signal), or the device 10 may only be a device that does not transmit an SLSS.
装置10的处理单元11根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。The processing unit 11 of the device 10 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
例如,当装置10发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2,装置10根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by the device 10 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and the device 10 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,装置10根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and the device 10 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
方式A#2:装置10的处理单元11根据装置10的同步信息确定用于发送参考信号RS#1的资源。Manner A#2: The processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the resource for transmitting the reference signal RS# 1 according to the synchronization information of the device 10.
可选地,这里的资源可以是频域资源、时域资源中的任意一种或多种。Optionally, the resources here may be any one or more of frequency domain resources and time domain resources.
例如,具体的,处理单元11根据所述同步信息确定参考信号RS#1在物理资源块中的子载波。For example, specifically, the processing unit 11 determines the subcarrier of the reference signal RS# 1 in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
例如,处理单元11根据所述同步信息确定参考信号RS#1在时隙中的符号位置。For example, the processing unit 11 determines the symbol position of the reference signal RS# 1 in the time slot according to the synchronization information.
在S402,装置10向第二终端装置(例如,上述UE#2)发送所述第一参考信号。In S402, the device 10 transmits the first reference signal to the second terminal device (for example, the aforementioned UE#2).
具体的,装置10(例如,上述UE#1)向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1。Specifically, the device 10 (for example, the aforementioned UE#1) sends the reference signal RS# 1 to the UE# 2.
进一步可选地,RS#1可以是同一个时隙中相同类型的多个参考信号RS,也可以是同一个时隙中不同类型的多个参考信号。Further optionally, RS# 1 may be multiple reference signals RS of the same type in the same time slot, or multiple reference signals of different types in the same time slot.
例如,对于不同类型的参考信号,参考信号RS#1可以是装置10发送数据时使用的DMRS、和/或装置10发送调度数据时的控制信息的DMRS。For example, for different types of reference signals, the reference signal RS# 1 may be a DMRS used when the device 10 transmits data, and/or a DMRS used for control information when the device 10 transmits scheduling data.
再例如,参考信号RS#1可以是装置10发送调度数据时一起发送的参考信号RS,包括PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。For another example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be a reference signal RS that is sent together when the device 10 sends scheduling data, including PT-RS, CSI-RS, or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH.
再例如,参考信号RS#1可以是装置10的无数据发射时单独发射的RS,包括:PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。也可以是承载在传输数据时隙中的PT-RS,CSI-RS或反馈信道PSFCH中使用的RS。For another example, the reference signal RS# 1 may be an RS separately transmitted by the device 10 when no data is transmitted, including: PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH. It can also be PT-RS, CSI-RS or RS used in the feedback channel PSFCH carried in the data transmission slot.
可选的,在装置10向UE#2发送参考信号RS#1前,装置10确定参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第一预设值,或者装置10确定参考信号RS#1的带宽大于第二预设值。Optionally, before the device 10 sends the reference signal RS# 1 to the UE# 2, the device 10 determines that the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the first preset value, or the device 10 determines that the bandwidth of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the first preset value. Two preset values.
在一种实现形式中,装置10的处理单元11,可以根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,处理单元11根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源;输出口14,用于向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号;其中,同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:第一终端装置的同步源的类型、第一终端装置的同步源与卫星之间的同步跳数、第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。In an implementation form, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the processing unit 11 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device. The resource of the first reference signal; the output port 14 is used to send the first reference signal to the second terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of the synchronization source of the first terminal device, the first terminal The number of synchronization hops between the synchronization source of the device and the satellite, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to the satellite or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示同步信息,UE#1可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者UE#1可以是不发送同步信号的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate synchronization information, UE# 1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE# 1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
UE#1根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。 UE# 1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
例如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE# 1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE# 1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,装置10的处理单元11可以根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,包括:处理单元11根据同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列的参数,参数包括以下参数中的至少一项:第一参考信号的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码OCC、序列长度。For example, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the parameters of the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information, and the parameters include at least one of the following parameters One item: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
例如,装置10的处理单元11可以根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:处理单元11根据同步信息确定第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波。For example, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the subcarrier of the first reference signal in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
例如,装置10的处理单元11可以根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,包括:处理单元11根据同步信息和第一设备使用的同步信号标识确定第一参考信号的序列的参数中的以下至少一项:第一参考信号的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码OCC、序列长度。For example, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information and the synchronization signal identifier used by the first device At least one of the following parameters: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, the cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
例如,装置10的处理单元11可以根据承载第一参考信号所在时隙中的符号数确定第一参考信号的序列长度;和/或处理单元11具体用于根据第一参考信号的带宽确定第一参考信号的序列长度。For example, the processing unit 11 of the apparatus 10 may determine the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the number of symbols in the time slot in which the first reference signal is carried; and/or the processing unit 11 is specifically configured to determine the first reference signal according to the bandwidth of the first reference signal. The sequence length of the reference signal.
例如,装置10的处理单元11可以根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:处理单元11根据同步信息与第一参考信号的资源映射方式确定发送第一参考信号的资源;其中,同步信息与第一参考信号的资源映射方式,包括:同步信息映射在第一参考信号所在时隙的相邻两个符号上;第一参考信号所在时隙包括至少两个符号。For example, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 may determine the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines to send the first reference signal according to the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal. The resource of the signal; wherein the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal includes: the synchronization information is mapped on two adjacent symbols of the time slot where the first reference signal is located; the time slot where the first reference signal is located includes at least two symbol.
在本申请实施例中,UE#1可以使用生成参考信号RS#1的序列的参数来指示同步信息,UE#1可以是发送同步信号的装置,或者UE#1可以是不发送同步信号的装置。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 1 may use the parameters of the sequence generating the reference signal RS# 1 to indicate synchronization information, UE# 1 may be a device that sends synchronization signals, or UE# 1 may be a device that does not send synchronization signals .
UE#1根据对应的同步信息使用对应的同步序列的参数来生成相应的RS,然后向UE#2发送相应的RS。 UE# 1 uses the parameters of the corresponding synchronization sequence to generate the corresponding RS according to the corresponding synchronization information, and then sends the corresponding RS to UE# 2.
例如,当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1或者RS2。For example, when the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1 and RS2, and UE# 1 sends RS1 or RS2 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
例如,当指示的同步信息为2比特时,参考信号的序列包括RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4,UE#1根据待传输的同步信息向UE#2发送RS1、RS2、RS3或RS4。For example, when the indicated synchronization information is 2 bits, the sequence of the reference signal includes RS1, RS2, RS3, and RS4, and UE# 1 sends RS1, RS2, RS3, or RS4 to UE# 2 according to the synchronization information to be transmitted.
在本申请实施例中,UE#2可以检测同步信息对应的不同的RS,UE#2根据接收到的不同的RS来获取UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the received different RSs.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则UE#2从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则UE#2从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 2 bits, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
例如,装置10的输出口14向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号前,处理单元11确定第一参考信号的序列长度大于第一预设值;或者处理单元11确定第一参考信号的带宽大于第二预设值。For example, before the output port 14 of the device 10 sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the processing unit 11 determines that the sequence length of the first reference signal is greater than the first preset value; or the processing unit 11 determines that the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than The second preset value.
例如,装置10的输出口14还用于向第二终端装置发送第一控制信息,第一控制信息用于指示第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息;或者,第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码用于指示第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。For example, the output port 14 of the device 10 is also used to send first control information to the second terminal device, the first control information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device; or, the cycle of the first control information The redundancy check code is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
例如,装置10的输出口14还用于向第二终端装置发送第一数据,第一数据的循环冗余校验码用于指示第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。For example, the output port 14 of the device 10 is also used to send the first data to the second terminal device, and the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
例如,装置10的输出口14向第二终端装置发送第一参考信号前,处理单元11确定第一终端装置支持基于第一参考信号的同步。For example, before the output port 14 of the device 10 sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the processing unit 11 determines that the first terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
在一种实现方式中,装置10可以作为接收参考信号的设备,或者接收参考信号、控制信息和/或数据的设备,以下对装置10作为接收设备执行的方法步骤进行详细介绍。In an implementation manner, the device 10 may be used as a device for receiving reference signals, or a device for receiving reference signals, control information and/or data. The method steps performed by the device 10 as a receiving device are described in detail below.
在S501,装置10(例如,上述UE#2)的输入口13接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号。In S501, the input port 13 of the device 10 (for example, the aforementioned UE#2) receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device.
具体的,装置10的输入口13接收来自第一终端装置(例如,上述UE#1)的参考信号RS#1。Specifically, the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the reference signal RS# 1 from the first terminal device (for example, the aforementioned UE#1).
可选的,在装置10接收来自UE#1的参考信号RS#1前,处理单元11确定装置10支持基于参考信号的同步。Optionally, before the device 10 receives the reference signal RS# 1 from the UE# 1, the processing unit 11 determines that the device 10 supports synchronization based on the reference signal.
应理解,是否支持基于参考信号的同步可以是UE的一种能力。如果UE的能力不支 持基于参考信号的同步,则装置10不接收承载同步信息的RS。如果UE的能力支持基于参考信号的同步,则装置10才能接收承载同步信息的RS。It should be understood that whether to support synchronization based on reference signals may be a capability of the UE. If the UE's capabilities do not support synchronization based on reference signals, the device 10 does not receive RSs carrying synchronization information. If the UE's capability supports synchronization based on the reference signal, the device 10 can receive the RS carrying synchronization information.
可选地,装置10向网络设备发送它是否支持基于参考信号的UE能力。Optionally, the apparatus 10 sends to the network device whether it supports the UE capability based on the reference signal.
在S502,第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。In S502, the second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or, the second terminal device determines the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of a terminal device.
具体的,装置10根据参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息;和/或装置10根据参考信号RS#1的资源获取UE#1的同步信息。Specifically, the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of the UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1; and/or the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of the UE# 1 according to the resource of the reference signal RS# 1.
在本申请实施例中,装置10可以检测同步信息对应的不同的RS,装置10根据接收到的不同的RS来获取UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the device 10 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the received different RSs.
例如,装置10根据UE#1发送的参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息。For example, the device 10 obtains the synchronization information of the UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 sent by the UE# 1.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则装置10从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, the device 10 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains the 1 bit. Synchronization information.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则装置10从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 2 bits, the device 10 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the four candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), and obtains To the 2-bit synchronization information actually transmitted.
在S503,装置10的处理单元11根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。In S503, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
具体的,装置10的处理单元11根据UE#1的同步信息、优先级信息确定装置10的同步源。Specifically, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization source of the device 10 according to the synchronization information and priority information of the UE# 1.
例如,当装置10的候选同步源包括一个同步源时,装置10可以根据UE#1的同步信息确定装置10的同步源。For example, when the candidate synchronization source of the device 10 includes one synchronization source, the device 10 may determine the synchronization source of the device 10 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1.
例如,当装置10的候选同步源包括多个同步源时,装置10可以根据UE#1的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定装置10的同步源。For example, when the candidate synchronization source of the device 10 includes multiple synchronization sources, the device 10 may determine the synchronization source of the device 10 according to the synchronization information of UE# 1 and the priority information of the synchronization source.
在本申请实施例中,当装置10同时检测到UE#3发送的同步信号SLSS和UE#1发送的参考信号RS时,装置10可以按照表3A中的优先级信息#P3选择同步源。In the embodiment of the present application, when the device 10 detects the synchronization signal SLSS sent by UE# 3 and the reference signal RS sent by UE# 1 at the same time, the device 10 can select the synchronization source according to the priority information #P3 in Table 3A.
表3ATable 3A
作为同步源时,上表3A中P1到P5的优先级依次下降。When used as a synchronization source, the priorities of P1 to P5 in Table 3A above decrease in order.
可选地,UE#3同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述UE#1同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,UE#1相对于UE#3具有更低的优先级。如在表3B中的示例。Optionally, when the number of hops for UE# 3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE# 1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE# 1 has a lower priority than UE# 3. As in the example in Table 3B.
表3BTable 3B
作为同步源时,上表3B中P1到P5的优先级依次下降。When used as a synchronization source, the priorities of P1 to P5 in Table 3B above are sequentially decreased.
在表3B中,UE#3同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述UE#1同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,UE#1相对于UE#3具有更高的优先级。In Table 3B, when the number of hops for UE# 3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE# 1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE# 1 has a higher priority than UE# 3.
表3CTable 3C
在表3C中,UE#3同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述UE#1同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同时,UE#1和所述UE#3的优先级相同。In Table 3C, when the number of hops for UE# 3 to synchronize to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops for UE# 1 to synchronize to the satellite or base station, UE# 1 and UE# 3 have the same priority.
例如,装置10的输入口13接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号前,处理单元11确定第二终端装置支持基于第一参考信号的同步。For example, before the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device, the processing unit 11 determines that the second terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
在一种实现形式中,装置10的输入口13接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号;处理单元11根据第一参考信号的序列确定第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,处理单元11根据第一参考信号的资源确定第一终端装置的同步信息;处理单元11根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第二终端装置的同步源;其中,同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:第一终端装置的同步源的类型、第一终端装置同步到同步源的路径的跳数、第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。In an implementation form, the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device; the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the processing unit 11 Determine the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal; the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device; wherein the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: The type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops of the path from which the first terminal device is synchronized to the synchronization source, whether the first terminal device is directly synchronized to a satellite or network device, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network device.
在本申请实施例中,UE#2可以检测同步信息对应的不同的RS,UE#2根据接收到的不同的RS来获取UE#1的同步信息。In the embodiment of the present application, UE# 2 can detect different RSs corresponding to the synchronization information, and UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the received different RSs.
例如,UE#2根据UE#1发送的参考信号RS#1的序列获取UE#1的同步信息。For example, UE# 2 obtains the synchronization information of UE# 1 according to the sequence of the reference signal RS# 1 sent by UE# 1.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为1比特时,则UE#2从2个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到这1比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 1 bit, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the two candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2), and obtains this 1 Bits of synchronization information.
当UE#1发送的参考信号的序列指示的同步信息为2比特时,则UE#2从4个候选的同步序列(RS1、RS2、RS3、RS4)中检测UE#1实际使用的序列,从而获取到实际传输的2比特的同步信息。When the synchronization information indicated by the sequence of the reference signal sent by UE# 1 is 2 bits, UE# 2 detects the sequence actually used by UE# 1 from the 4 candidate synchronization sequences (RS1, RS2, RS3, RS4), thereby Get the actually transmitted 2-bit synchronization information.
例如,装置10的处理单元11根据第一参考信号的资源确定第一终端装置的同步信息,包括:处理单元11根据第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波确定第一终端装置的同步信息。For example, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resources of the first reference signal, including: the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the subcarriers of the first reference signal in the physical resource block .
例如,装置10的处理单元11根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第二终端装置的同步 源,包括:处理单元11根据第一终端装置的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定第二终端装置的同步源。For example, the processing unit 11 of the device 10 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, including: the processing unit 11 determines the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device and the priority information of the synchronization source Synchronization source.
例如,装置10的输入口13还用于检测第一参考信号的信号质量;当第一参考信号的信号质量大于第一阈值时,处理单元11将第一终端装置作为候选同步源。For example, the input port 13 of the device 10 is also used to detect the signal quality of the first reference signal; when the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than the first threshold, the processing unit 11 uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source.
例如,装置10的输入口13接收来自第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;在第一终端装置满足预设条件时,处理单元11将第一终端装置作为候选同步源;其中,预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:第一数据的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,第一参考信号的带宽大于第一预设值。For example, the input port 13 of the device 10 receives first data and/or first control information from a first terminal device; when the first terminal device meets a preset condition, the processing unit 11 uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source; Wherein, the preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is checked correctly; or, the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is checked correctly; or, the first reference The bandwidth of the signal is greater than the first preset value.
如图2所示,UE#2可以检测到来自UE#1、UE#3、UE#7发送的参考信号,因此当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。As shown in Figure 2, UE# 2 can detect the reference signals sent from UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7. Therefore, when UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 meet the preset conditions, UE# 1. UE# 3 and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
例如,UE#2可以接收来自UE#1(或者UE#3、UE#7)发送的数据#D1和/或调度分配SA信息;当UE#1、UE#3、UE#7满足预设条件时,UE#1、UE#3、UE#7可以作为UE#2的候选同步源。For example, UE# 2 can receive data #D1 and/or scheduling allocation SA information sent from UE#1 (or UE# 3, UE#7); when UE# 1, UE# 3, UE# 7 meet preset conditions At this time, UE# 1, UE# 3, and UE# 7 can be used as candidate synchronization sources for UE# 2.
其中,上述预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:数据#D1的循环冗余校验码校验正确;所述调度分配SA信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;参考信号RS#1的符号占用的资源带宽大于第一预设值;参考信号RS#1的序列长度大于第二预设值。Wherein, the above-mentioned preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of data #D1 is checked correctly; the cyclic redundancy check code of the scheduling allocation SA information is checked correctly; reference signal RS# The resource bandwidth occupied by the symbol of 1 is greater than the first preset value; the sequence length of the reference signal RS# 1 is greater than the second preset value.
例如,装置10的输入口13还用于接收来自第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;处理单元11根据第一数据的DMRS和第一控制信息的DMRS确定第一终端装置的同步信息;或者处理单元11根据第一数据的循环冗余校验码、和/或第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码确定第一终端装置的同步信息。For example, the input port 13 of the device 10 is also used to receive first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device; the processing unit 11 determines the first terminal device according to the DMRS of the first data and the DMRS of the first control information Or the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information.
例如,装置10的输入口13检测到第三设备发送的侧行链路同步信号,处理单元11根据第一优先级信息(表3)确定第二终端装置的同步源。For example, the input port 13 of the device 10 detects the side link synchronization signal sent by the third device, and the processing unit 11 determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the first priority information (Table 3).
例如,装置10的输入口13接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号前,处理单元11确定第二终端装置支持基于第一参考信号的同步。For example, before the input port 13 of the device 10 receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device, the processing unit 11 determines that the second terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
作为一种实现方式,输入口13和输出口14的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理单元11可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理单元或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation manner, the functions of the input port 13 and the output port 14 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. The processing unit 11 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的终端设备。即将实现处理单元11、输入口13和输出口14功能的程序代码存储在存储单元12中,通用处理单元通过执行存储单元12中的代码来实现处理单元11、输入口13和输出口14的功能。As another implementation manner, a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The program codes that realize the functions of the processing unit 11, the input port 13 and the output port 14 are stored in the storage unit 12. The general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 11, the input port 13 and the output port 14 by executing the code in the storage unit 12 .
图16为本申请提供的一种终端设备20的结构示意图。上述装置20可以配置在该终端设备20中,或者,该装置20本身可以即为该终端设备20。或者说,该终端设备20可以执行上述方法中终端设备执行的动作。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 20 provided by this application. The foregoing apparatus 20 may be configured in the terminal device 20, or the apparatus 20 itself may be the terminal device 20. In other words, the terminal device 20 can execute the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
为了便于说明,图16仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图16所示,终端设备20包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。For ease of description, FIG. 16 only shows the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 16, the terminal device 20 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述传输预编码矩阵的 指示方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据,例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment The described action. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above embodiments. The control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals. The control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图16仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art can understand that, for ease of description, FIG. 16 only shows a memory and a processor. In actual terminal devices, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
例如,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图16中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。For example, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data. The processor in FIG. 16 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as buses. Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备20的收发单元201,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备20的处理单元202。如图16所示,终端设备20包括收发单元201和处理单元202。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元201中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元201中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元201包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and control circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 201 of the terminal device 20, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 202 of the terminal device 20. As shown in FIG. 16, the terminal device 20 includes a transceiver unit 201 and a processing unit 202. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 201 can be regarded as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 201 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
在一种设计中,该装置为通信芯片,通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口,以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。In one design, the device is a communication chip, and the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for sending information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
在另一种设计中,所述装置为通信设备,通信设备可以包括用于发送信息或数据的,以及用于接收信息或数据的。In another design, the apparatus is a communication device, and the communication device may include a device for sending information or data and a device for receiving information or data.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本 申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may be aware that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (40)
- 一种通信的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method of communication, characterized in that it comprises:第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源;The first terminal device determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the first terminal device determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device ;所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号;Sending the first reference signal to the second terminal device by the first terminal device;其中,所述同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:所述第一终端装置的同步源的类型、所述第一终端装置与卫星或网络设备之间的跳数、所述第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、所述第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。Wherein, the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops between the first terminal device and satellite or network equipment, and the first terminal device Whether it is directly synchronized to a satellite or a network device, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network device.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first terminal device determining the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device comprises:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息确定所述第一参考信号的序列的参数,所述参数包括以下参数中的至少一项:所述第一参考信号的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码OCC、序列长度。The first terminal device determines a parameter of the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information, and the parameter includes at least one of the following parameters: an initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, a root sequence number , The cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first terminal device determining the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device comprises:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息确定所述第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波。The first terminal device determines the subcarrier of the first reference signal in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
- 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the method further comprises:所述第一终端装置根据承载所述第一参考信号所在时隙中的符号数确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度;和/或,所述第一终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的带宽确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度。The first terminal device determines the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the number of symbols in the time slot in which the first reference signal is carried; and/or, the first terminal device determines the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the The bandwidth determines the sequence length of the first reference signal.
- 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the first terminal device determining the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device comprises:所述第一终端装置根据所述同步信息与所述第一参考信号的资源映射方式确定所述发送第一参考信号的资源;所述同步信息与所述第一参考信号的资源映射方式,包括:所述同步信息映射在所述第一参考信号所在时隙的相邻两个符号上;所述第一参考信号所在时隙包括至少两个符号。The first terminal device determines the resource for transmitting the first reference signal according to the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal; the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal includes : The synchronization information is mapped on two adjacent symbols of the time slot where the first reference signal is located; the time slot where the first reference signal is located includes at least two symbols.
- 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号为以下参考信号中的任一种:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the first reference signal is any one of the following reference signals:用于控制信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于数据信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于广播信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于反馈信道的参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号PT-RS。Demodulation reference signal DMRS for control channel, demodulation reference signal DMRS for data channel, demodulation reference signal DMRS for broadcast channel, reference signal for feedback channel, channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, Phase tracking reference signal PT-RS.
- 根据权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein before the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the method further comprises:所述第一终端装置确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度大于第一预设值;或者The first terminal device determines that the sequence length of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value; or所述第一终端装置确定所述第一参考信号的带宽大于第二预设值。The first terminal device determines that the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a second preset value.
- 根据权利要求1-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the method further comprises:所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息;或者,所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。The first terminal device sends first control information to the second terminal device, where the first control information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device; or, the first control The cyclic redundancy check code of the information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the method further comprises:所述第一终端装置向所述第二终端装置发送第一数据,所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。The first terminal device sends first data to the second terminal device, and the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- 根据权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein before the first terminal device sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the method further comprises:所述第一终端装置确定所述第一终端装置支持基于所述第一参考信号的同步。The first terminal device determines that the first terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- 一种通信的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method of communication, characterized in that it comprises:第二终端装置从第一终端装置接收第一参考信号;The second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device;所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,所述第二终端装置根据用于接收所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息;The second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the second terminal device determines the synchronization information according to the resource used to receive the first reference signal Said synchronization information of the first terminal device;所述第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源;The second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device;其中,所述同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:所述第一终端装置的同步源的类型、所述第一终端装置与卫星或网络设备之间的跳数、所述第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、所述第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。Wherein, the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops between the first terminal device and satellite or network equipment, and the first terminal device Whether it is directly synchronized to a satellite or a network device, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network device.
- 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二终端装置根据所述用于接收所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the second terminal device determining the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource used to receive the first reference signal comprises:所述第二终端装置根据所述第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。The second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the subcarriers in the physical resource block of the first reference signal.
- 根据权利要求11或12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源,包括:The method according to any one of claims 11 or 12, wherein the second terminal device determining the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device comprises:所述第二终端装置根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。The second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device and the priority information of the synchronization source.
- 根据权利要求11-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-13, wherein the method further comprises:所述第二终端装置检测所述第一参考信号的信号质量;Detecting the signal quality of the first reference signal by the second terminal device;当所述第一参考信号的信号质量大于第一阈值时,所述第二终端装置将所述第一终端装置作为候选同步源;When the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than a first threshold, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source;所述第二设备根据所述候选同步源确定所述第二设备的同步源。The second device determines the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source.
- 根据权利要求11-14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-14, wherein the method further comprises:所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;The second terminal device receives the first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device;在所述第一终端装置满足预设条件时,所述第二终端装置将所述第一终端装置作为候选同步源;When the first terminal device meets a preset condition, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source;所述第二设备根据所述候选同步源确定所述第二设备的同步源;Determining, by the second device, the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source;其中,所述预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,所述第一参考信号 的带宽大于第一预设值。Wherein, the preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is checked correctly; or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is checked correctly Or, the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value.
- 根据权利要求11-15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-15, wherein the method further comprises:所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;The second terminal device receives the first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device;所述第二终端装置根据所述第一数据的DMRS和所述第一控制信息的DMRS确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息;或者The second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the DMRS of the first data and the DMRS of the first control information; or所述第二终端装置根据所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码、和/或所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。The second terminal device determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information.
- 根据权利要求11-16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-16, wherein the method further comprises:所述第二终端装置检测到第三设备发送的侧行链路同步信号,所述第二终端装置根据第一优先级信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源,所述第一优先级信息包括以下中的任意一种:The second terminal device detects the side link synchronization signal sent by the third device, the second terminal device determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the first priority information, and the first priority information Including any of the following:所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置和所述第三设备的优先级相同;The number of hops synchronized by the third device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, and the priorities of the first terminal device and the third device are the same;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置相对于所述第三设备具有更高的优先级;The number of hops that the third device synchronizes to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops that the first terminal device synchronizes to the satellite or the base station, and the first terminal device has a higher priority relative to the third device;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置相对于所述第三设备具有更低的优先级;The number of hops that the third device synchronizes to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops that the first terminal device synchronizes to the satellite or the base station, and the first terminal device has a lower priority relative to the third device;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置根据预配置信息确定所述第一终端装置和所述第三设备的优先级。The number of hops that the third device synchronizes to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops that the first terminal device synchronizes to the satellite or the base station, and the first terminal device determines the first terminal device and the first terminal device according to pre-configuration information. The priority of the third device.
- 根据权利要求11-17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-17, wherein before the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device, the method further comprises:所述第二终端装置确定所述第二终端装置支持基于所述第一参考信号的同步。The second terminal device determines that the second terminal device supports synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- 根据权利要求11-18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号包括以下信号中的任一种:The method according to any one of claims 11-18, wherein the first reference signal comprises any one of the following signals:控制信道的解调参考信号DMRS、数据信道的解调参考信号DMRS、广播信道的解调参考信号DMRS、反馈信道的参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号PT-RS。Control channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, data channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, broadcast channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, feedback channel reference signal, channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal PT-RS.
- 根据权利要求11-19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置为发送同步信号的装置,或者,所述第一终端装置为不发送同步信号的装置。The method according to any one of claims 11-19, wherein the first terminal device is a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the first terminal device is a device that does not send a synchronization signal.
- 一种通信的装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:处理单元,用于根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,和/或,处理单元用于根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源;The processing unit is configured to determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, and/or the processing unit is configured to determine the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device;发送单元,用于向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号;A sending unit, configured to send the first reference signal to a second terminal device;其中,所述同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:所述第一终端装置的同步源的类型、所述第一终端装置与卫星或网络设备之间的跳数、所述第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、所述第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。Wherein, the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops between the first terminal device and satellite or network equipment, and the first terminal device Whether it is directly synchronized to a satellite or a network device, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network device.
- 根据权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定第一参考信号的序列,包括:The device according to claim 21, wherein the processing unit determines the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, comprising:所述处理单元根据所述同步信息确定所述第一参考信号的序列的参数,所述参数包括以下参数中的至少一项:所述第一参考信号的序列的初始值、根序列号、序列的循环移位值、序列的正交覆盖码OCC、序列长度。The processing unit determines the parameters of the sequence of the first reference signal according to the synchronization information, where the parameters include at least one of the following parameters: the initial value of the sequence of the first reference signal, the root sequence number, and the sequence The cyclic shift value of the sequence, the orthogonal cover code OCC of the sequence, and the sequence length.
- 根据权利要求21或22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:The device according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the processing unit determines the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, comprising:所述处理单元用于根据所述同步信息确定所述第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波。The processing unit is configured to determine the subcarrier of the first reference signal in the physical resource block according to the synchronization information.
- 根据权利要求21-23中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于根据承载所述第一参考信号所在时隙中的符号数确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度;和/或,所述处理单元用于根据所述第一参考信号的带宽确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度。The apparatus according to any one of claims 21-23, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine the sequence of the first reference signal according to the number of symbols in the time slot in which the first reference signal is carried Length; and/or, the processing unit is configured to determine the sequence length of the first reference signal according to the bandwidth of the first reference signal.
- 根据权利要求21-24中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定用于发送第一参考信号的资源,包括:The device according to any one of claims 21-24, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine a resource for sending the first reference signal according to synchronization information of the first terminal device, comprising:所述处理单元用于根据所述同步信息与所述第一参考信号的资源映射方式确定所述发送第一参考信号的资源;所述同步信息与所述第一参考信号的资源映射方式,包括:所述同步信息映射在所述第一参考信号所在时隙的相邻两个符号上;所述第一参考信号所在时隙包括至少两个符号。The processing unit is configured to determine the resource for sending the first reference signal according to the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal; the resource mapping mode of the synchronization information and the first reference signal includes : The synchronization information is mapped on two adjacent symbols of the time slot where the first reference signal is located; the time slot where the first reference signal is located includes at least two symbols.
- 根据权利要求21-25中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号包括以下参考信号中的任一种:The apparatus according to any one of claims 21-25, wherein the first reference signal comprises any one of the following reference signals:用于控制信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于数据信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于广播信道的解调参考信号DMRS、用于反馈信道的参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号PT-RS。Demodulation reference signal DMRS for control channel, demodulation reference signal DMRS for data channel, demodulation reference signal DMRS for broadcast channel, reference signal for feedback channel, channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, Phase tracking reference signal PT-RS.
- 根据权利要求21-26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,在所述发送单元向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号前,所述第一终端装置确定所述第一参考信号的序列长度大于第一预设值;或者所述第一终端装置确定所述第一参考信号的带宽大于第二预设值。The device according to any one of claims 21-26, wherein before the sending unit sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the first terminal device determines the first reference signal The sequence length of the signal is greater than the first preset value; or the first terminal device determines that the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than the second preset value.
- 根据权利要求21-27中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第一控制信息,所述第一控制信息用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息;或者,所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。The device according to any one of claims 21-27, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send first control information to the second terminal device, and the first control information is used to indicate the Part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device; or, the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- 根据权利要求21-28中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元还用于向所述第二终端装置发送第一数据,所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码用于指示所述第一终端装置的同步信息的部分或者全部信息。The device according to any one of claims 21-28, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send first data to the second terminal device, a cyclic redundancy check code of the first data Used to indicate part or all of the synchronization information of the first terminal device.
- 根据权利要求21-29中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送单元向第二终端装置发送所述第一参考信号前,所述第一终端装置确定所述第一终端装置支持基于所述第一参考信号的同步。The device according to any one of claims 21-29, wherein before the sending unit sends the first reference signal to the second terminal device, the first terminal device determines that the first terminal device Support synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- 一种通信的装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it comprises:接收单元,用于从第一终端装置接收第一参考信号;A receiving unit, configured to receive a first reference signal from a first terminal device;处理单元,用于根据所述第一参考信号的序列确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,和/或,所述处理单元用于根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息;The processing unit is configured to determine the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the sequence of the first reference signal, and/or the processing unit is configured to determine the first terminal according to the resource of the first reference signal Synchronization information of the device;所述处理单元根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源;The processing unit determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device;其中,所述同步信息包括以下信息中的至少一项:所述第一终端装置的同步源的类型、所述第一终端装置与同步源之间的跳数、所述第一终端装置是否直接同步到卫星或网络设备、所述第一终端装置是否处于网络设备的覆盖范围内。Wherein, the synchronization information includes at least one of the following information: the type of synchronization source of the first terminal device, the number of hops between the first terminal device and the synchronization source, and whether the first terminal device directly It is synchronized to a satellite or network equipment, and whether the first terminal device is within the coverage of the network equipment.
- 根据权利要求31所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据所述第一参考信号的资源确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息,包括:The device according to claim 31, wherein the processing unit determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the resource of the first reference signal, comprising:所述处理单元根据所述第一参考信号在物理资源块中的子载波确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。The processing unit determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the subcarriers of the first reference signal in the physical resource block.
- 根据权利要求31或32中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源,包括:The device according to any one of claims 31 or 32, wherein the processing unit determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device, comprising:所述处理单元根据所述第一终端装置的同步信息和同步源的优先级信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源。The processing unit determines the synchronization source of the second terminal device according to the synchronization information of the first terminal device and the priority information of the synchronization source.
- 根据权利要求31-33中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元还用于检测所述第一参考信号的信号质量;The apparatus according to any one of claims 31-33, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to detect the signal quality of the first reference signal;当所述第一参考信号的信号质量大于第一阈值时,所述第二终端装置将所述第一终端装置作为候选同步源;When the signal quality of the first reference signal is greater than a first threshold, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source;所述第二设备根据所述候选同步源确定所述第二设备的同步源。The second device determines the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source.
- 根据权利要求31-34中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二终端装置接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;The device according to any one of claims 31-34, wherein the second terminal device receives first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device;在所述第一终端装置满足预设条件时,所述第二终端装置将所述第一终端装置作为候选同步源;When the first terminal device meets a preset condition, the second terminal device uses the first terminal device as a candidate synchronization source;所述第二设备根据所述候选同步源确定所述第二设备的同步源;Determining, by the second device, the synchronization source of the second device according to the candidate synchronization source;其中,所述预设条件包括以下条件中的至少一项:所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码校验正确;或者,所述第一参考信号的带宽大于第一预设值。Wherein, the preset condition includes at least one of the following conditions: the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data is checked correctly; or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information is checked correctly Or, the bandwidth of the first reference signal is greater than a first preset value.
- 根据权利要求31-35中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元还用于接收来自所述第一终端装置的第一数据和/或第一控制信息;The device according to any one of claims 31-35, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive first data and/or first control information from the first terminal device;所述处理单元根据所述第一数据的DMRS和所述第一控制信息的DMRS确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息;或者The processing unit determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the DMRS of the first data and the DMRS of the first control information; or所述处理单元根据所述第一数据的循环冗余校验码、和/或所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码确定所述第一终端装置的同步信息。The processing unit determines the synchronization information of the first terminal device according to the cyclic redundancy check code of the first data and/or the cyclic redundancy check code of the first control information.
- 根据权利要求31-36中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收单元检测到第三设备发送的侧行链路同步信号,所述处理单元用于根据第一优先级信息确定所述第二终端装置的同步源,所述第一优先级信息包括以下中的任意一种:The apparatus according to any one of claims 31-36, wherein the receiving unit detects the side link synchronization signal sent by the third device, and the processing unit is configured to determine according to the first priority information For the synchronization source of the second terminal device, the first priority information includes any one of the following:所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置和所述第三设备的优先级相同;The number of hops synchronized by the third device to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops synchronized by the first terminal device to the satellite or base station, and the priorities of the first terminal device and the third device are the same;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置相对于所述第三设备具有更高的优先级;The number of hops that the third device synchronizes to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops that the first terminal device synchronizes to the satellite or the base station, and the first terminal device has a higher priority relative to the third device;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述第一终端装置相对于所述第三设备具有更低的优先级;The number of hops that the third device synchronizes to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops that the first terminal device synchronizes to the satellite or the base station, and the first terminal device has a lower priority relative to the third device;所述第三设备同步到卫星或基站的跳数和所述第一终端装置同步到卫星或基站的跳数相同,所述处理单元用于根据预配置信息确定所述第一终端装置和所述第三设备的优先级。The number of hops that the third device synchronizes to the satellite or base station is the same as the number of hops that the first terminal device synchronizes to the satellite or the base station, and the processing unit is configured to determine the first terminal device and the first terminal device and the base station according to pre-configuration information. The priority of the third device.
- 根据权利要求31-37中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,第二终端装置接收来自第一终端装置的第一参考信号前,所述第二终端装置确定所述第二终端装置支持基于所述第一参考信号的同步。The device according to any one of claims 31-37, wherein before the second terminal device receives the first reference signal from the first terminal device, the second terminal device determines that the second terminal device supports Synchronization based on the first reference signal.
- 根据权利要求31-38中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号包括以下信号中的任一种:The device according to any one of claims 31-38, wherein the first reference signal comprises any one of the following signals:控制信道的解调参考信号DMRS、数据信道的解调参考信号DMRS、广播信道的解调参考信号DMRS、反馈信道的参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS、相位跟踪参考信号PT-RS。Control channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, data channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, broadcast channel demodulation reference signal DMRS, feedback channel reference signal, channel state information reference signal CSI-RS, phase tracking reference signal PT-RS.
- 根据权利要求31-39中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一终端装置为发送同步信号的装置,或者,所述第一终端装置为不发送同步信号的装置。The device according to any one of claims 31-39, wherein the first terminal device is a device that sends a synchronization signal, or the first terminal device is a device that does not send a synchronization signal.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN201910252643.8 | 2019-03-29 | ||
CN201910252643.8A CN111757458B (en) | 2019-03-29 | 2019-03-29 | Communication method and terminal device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2020200002A1 true WO2020200002A1 (en) | 2020-10-08 |
Family
ID=72664549
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2020/081064 WO2020200002A1 (en) | 2019-03-29 | 2020-03-25 | Communication method and terminal device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN111757458B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2020200002A1 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN114137583A (en) * | 2021-11-02 | 2022-03-04 | 中国科学院国家授时中心 | Navigation communication integrated signal design method based on satellite platform |
WO2022197611A1 (en) * | 2021-03-16 | 2022-09-22 | Parsa Wireless Communications, Llc | Enhanced phase tracking reference signal based on chirp sequences |
CN115208725A (en) * | 2022-05-07 | 2022-10-18 | 中国人民解放军国防科技大学 | Method, device and medium for combining OFDM synchronization and information modulation |
WO2024021457A1 (en) * | 2022-07-25 | 2024-02-01 | 北京京东乾石科技有限公司 | Time synchronization apparatus and method, unmanned vehicle, roadside unit, and internet of vehicles system |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117750496A (en) * | 2022-09-22 | 2024-03-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Information transmission method and device |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2012035367A1 (en) * | 2010-09-14 | 2012-03-22 | Nokia Corporation | D2d communication procedures: beaconing; broadcast; conflict resolution |
CN104365035A (en) * | 2012-04-30 | 2015-02-18 | 英特尔公司 | An apparatus and method to enable device-to-device (D2D) communication in cellular networks |
CN106465312A (en) * | 2014-03-14 | 2017-02-22 | 三星电子株式会社 | Composition for preventing, treating, and alleviating urinary disturbances, containing piper longum l. extract |
CN107371233A (en) * | 2016-05-12 | 2017-11-21 | 财团法人工业技术研究院 | Synchronization signal transmitting/receiving method and wireless communication device |
Family Cites Families (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9191170B2 (en) * | 2011-11-03 | 2015-11-17 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for transreceiving reference signal in wireless access system and apparatus for same |
HUE041419T2 (en) * | 2013-05-06 | 2019-05-28 | Intel Ip Corp | Access network discovery and selection |
CN104812057A (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2015-07-29 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Data transmission method and device of D2D system |
CN105101394B (en) * | 2014-05-08 | 2018-11-02 | 宏碁股份有限公司 | Method of forming N-hop synchronization network for D2D communication |
CN105101391B (en) * | 2014-05-09 | 2018-11-20 | 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 | The method and apparatus that synchronisation source is coordinated, adjusts and compete synchronisation source in D2D system |
WO2016036182A1 (en) * | 2014-09-05 | 2016-03-10 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for performing communication between devices in wireless communication system and device for performing same |
CN105517139A (en) * | 2014-09-25 | 2016-04-20 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Synchronization method and user equipment of D2D communication |
WO2017024541A1 (en) * | 2015-08-12 | 2017-02-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Synchronous communication method and terminal |
JP6816857B2 (en) * | 2016-01-20 | 2021-01-20 | ホアウェイ・テクノロジーズ・カンパニー・リミテッド | Synchronous information transmission method and device |
JP6663076B2 (en) * | 2016-05-12 | 2020-03-11 | 華為技術有限公司Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd. | Information transmission method and user device |
-
2019
- 2019-03-29 CN CN201910252643.8A patent/CN111757458B/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-03-25 WO PCT/CN2020/081064 patent/WO2020200002A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2012035367A1 (en) * | 2010-09-14 | 2012-03-22 | Nokia Corporation | D2d communication procedures: beaconing; broadcast; conflict resolution |
CN104365035A (en) * | 2012-04-30 | 2015-02-18 | 英特尔公司 | An apparatus and method to enable device-to-device (D2D) communication in cellular networks |
CN106465312A (en) * | 2014-03-14 | 2017-02-22 | 三星电子株式会社 | Composition for preventing, treating, and alleviating urinary disturbances, containing piper longum l. extract |
CN107371233A (en) * | 2016-05-12 | 2017-11-21 | 财团法人工业技术研究院 | Synchronization signal transmitting/receiving method and wireless communication device |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2022197611A1 (en) * | 2021-03-16 | 2022-09-22 | Parsa Wireless Communications, Llc | Enhanced phase tracking reference signal based on chirp sequences |
CN114137583A (en) * | 2021-11-02 | 2022-03-04 | 中国科学院国家授时中心 | Navigation communication integrated signal design method based on satellite platform |
CN114137583B (en) * | 2021-11-02 | 2024-06-04 | 中国科学院国家授时中心 | Navigation communication integrated signal design method based on satellite platform |
CN115208725A (en) * | 2022-05-07 | 2022-10-18 | 中国人民解放军国防科技大学 | Method, device and medium for combining OFDM synchronization and information modulation |
CN115208725B (en) * | 2022-05-07 | 2024-02-02 | 中国人民解放军国防科技大学 | Method, device and medium for combining OFDM synchronization and information modulation |
WO2024021457A1 (en) * | 2022-07-25 | 2024-02-01 | 北京京东乾石科技有限公司 | Time synchronization apparatus and method, unmanned vehicle, roadside unit, and internet of vehicles system |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN111757458A (en) | 2020-10-09 |
CN111757458B (en) | 2022-04-12 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10986681B2 (en) | Apparatus and method for transmitting device to device communication channel in wireless communication system | |
US11683768B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for time and frequency tracking in cellular communication system | |
CN109314623B (en) | Method and apparatus for reference signal mapping for sidelink communications | |
CN109565406B (en) | Method and apparatus for vehicle-to-vehicle communication | |
CN110447188B (en) | Method for decoding V2X signal transmitted using transmit diversity method in wireless communication system and terminal using the same | |
WO2020200002A1 (en) | Communication method and terminal device | |
EP3793321B1 (en) | Method for transmitting a device to device communication channel in wireless communication system | |
WO2018137577A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2018018628A1 (en) | Reference signal sequence mapping method, configuration method, base station, and user equipment | |
CN112567831B (en) | Method and device for transmitting and receiving synchronization signals in a new radio vehicle-to-everything system | |
CN102958097B (en) | Realize synchronizing between subscriber equipment and the method and apparatus of perception | |
CN111837353A (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving positioning reference signal in wireless communication system | |
JP6698523B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for wireless communication using mixed formats | |
KR20200087698A (en) | Method and apparatus for determining sidelink physical layer session identification in new radio vehicle to everything system | |
CN119922679A (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving side link synchronization signals in a wireless communication system | |
CN116325564A (en) | Method and device for PUCCH coverage enhancement | |
CN108811074A (en) | Information transferring method and device | |
CN108029108B (en) | Data transmission method, terminal equipment and base station | |
US20240195570A1 (en) | Communication device and communication method | |
CN112868258A (en) | Method and apparatus for optimized HARQ operation | |
WO2018006741A1 (en) | Signal transmission method and apparatus | |
US20250212219A1 (en) | Terminal, base station, and communication method | |
US20250212190A1 (en) | Terminal, base station, and communication method | |
WO2024140774A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
CN119945866A (en) | Information transmission method and related equipment |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 20784103 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 20784103 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |